Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

In the Revit Architecture model. you will use the default template. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. sections. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . review the Revit Architecture templates. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project.rte. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. If you move the partition. drawings. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. construction. and phases when you need it. click Training Files. the parameter is one of association or connection. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. drawing sheets.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. If the length of the elevation is changed. and residential. 2D and 3D view. As you work in drawing and schedule views. hence. the operation of the software is parametric. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. You learn the terminology. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and open Metric\Templates. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and schedules required for a building project. In this case. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. every drawing sheet. and click Open. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. quantities. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. schedules. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. For most tutorial projects. how to navigate the user interface. scope. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select DefaultMetric. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the floor or roof remains connected. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. and plans. In this case. 13 Click OK. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. the hierarchy of elements.

tags. walls and roofs are hosts. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. walls. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. windows. dimensions. For example. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. levels. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. windows. Understanding the Basics | 7 . and roofs are model elements. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. filled regions. If you can draw. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. They help to describe or document the model. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. programming is not required.When you change something. and cabinets are model components. Datum elements help to define project context. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. dimensions. and 2D detail components. For example. They display in relevant views of the model. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. doors. grids. doors. Examples include detail lines. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. tags. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works.

by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. for example. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Often. section views. you must be in a section or elevation view. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. schedules. In other cases. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. families. and so forth). you do nothing to establish these relationships. elevation views. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. To place levels. Most often. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. first floor. for example. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. and ceilings. This information includes components used to design the model.In Revit Architecture. you can explicitly control them. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. from geometry to construction data. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. However. By using a single project file. The project file contains all information for the building design. top of wall. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Architecture. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. or bottom of foundation. floors. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. and types. such as roofs. and drawings of the design. views of the project.

A type can also be a style. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. In the steps that follow. categories of model elements include walls and beams. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. A type can be a specific size of a family. floors. roofs. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. For example. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. For example. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). dimensions. System families can be transferred between projects. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. System families include walls. the user interface is labeled. and levels. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. specifically its clear user interface. For example.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. ceilings. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. and similar graphical representation. identical use. In the following illustration. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. However.

The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. This creates a new project based on the default template. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. click (New). new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. In addition. By default. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

While working in the drawing area. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. which are listed on the menu. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. For example. and View. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. you type the required key combination to perform the command. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Edit. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands.

9 In the Type Selector. a door type is specified. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. when you add a door. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. When you select the Door tool. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. For example. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.

immediately below the Type Selector. In the drawing area. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. Navigating the User Interface | 13 .■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. containing buttons grouped by function.

Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.11 Click OK. In the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the tab in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. select Views (all). The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. sheets. walls. double-click its name. families. The browser is dockable. 3D). making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . schedules. and rename views. elevations. windows).You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and group name. reports. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. family category (doors. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. and groups. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. delete. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. families. To open a view.

click Wall. In this case. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. After creating a browser organization scheme. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. Do not click. The cursor displays as a pencil. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click Cancel. In the bottom left corner of the window." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog.

The status bar also provides information. In addition. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. There are several tools that help you find information. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . press F1 for help. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. Tooltips: To see tooltips. find a keyword on the Index tab. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. In the status bar. When you place the cursor over an element. in conjunction with tooltips. Windows: From any window. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. click Modify to end the Wall command. You can use this tri-pane. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). click on the Standard toolbar. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. 20 Press TAB. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Click the Help button. Toolbar: From the toolbar. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. After you are familiar with these tasks. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. You can also press SHIFT+F1. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. press F1 for context-sensitive help. regarding selected elements in a view. It highlights when the cursor is over it. If no Help button displays. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise.18 On the Design Bar. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5.

and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the following steps. 5 On the View toolbar. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. the view zooms out from the building model. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. For example. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. In the drawing area. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.rvt.

When you release the mouse button. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. . NOTE As you zoom in and out. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. If you do not have a wheel mouse. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. As you move the mouse. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. on the View toolbar. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 7 Click in the drawing area. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. the view zooms in on the selected area. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 10 To display SteeringWheels. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. this is referred to as a crossing selection.

20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and click Help. Cnst. as shown. When drawing or modifying a building model. display along the ends. Small blue dots. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. bottoms. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Similar controls. For more information about SteeringWheels. press ESC. expand Views (all). and select the wall. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and click the SteeringWheels tab. click Settings menu ➤ Options.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. 17 Type ZR. 15 To exit the wheel. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and double-click 2nd Flr. To define settings for SteeringWheels. referred to as shape handles. moving the wheel to the desired location. These are the drag controls. and then using the Zoom tool again. expand Floor Plans. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. called drag controls.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . to lengthen the wall. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. The table moves down. click to specify the starting position. In this case. After selecting the element to move. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. as shown. you want to move the table closer to the wall. and on the Tools toolbar. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. for example. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.18 Click and drag the left control. click (Move). and click again to specify the ending position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. 23 Click next to the lower wall. Some commands.

End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Move. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. click the Undo command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Some commands. on the Standard toolbar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click Lines. In this example. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. or press CTRL+Z. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. such as the Lines command. select the second item in the list. and drag it on top of the table. 26 On the Undo menu. 24 Select the plant. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. and click again to end it.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . On the Design Bar.29 To end the command. Press ESC twice. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. click Modify. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

When you have finished these tutorials. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Use keynotes to annotate a detail.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. this tutorial uses imperial units only. but for training purposes. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. Use detail components to define an assembly. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. 27 . detail. In Revit Architecture. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. illustrating how building components work together. In this tutorial. and annotate building assemblies. or referenced as a drafting view. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools.

for Name. If necessary. you will create a drafting view. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. and reference a drafting view. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. 3 In the Scale list. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. create a reference callout. and click OK.rvt. click Drafting View. scroll until the folder is displayed. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. enter Window Head Detail. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . import a DWG detail.

and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. The drawing area is still blank. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. as shown. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim.).dwg.In the Project Browser. select Black and White. located directly to the left of the drawing area. displaying the extents of the detail. The model zooms out. 6 In the Colors field list. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 9 Type ZR. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . and click Open.

30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 12 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. 13 Click Reference other view. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. click Callout. select Detail View: Detail. and in the Scale list. to activate the view selection list.The view displays to the specified area. 14 In the drawing area. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail.

and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area.The reference callout is created. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. in the Type Selector. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. and in the Scale list. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . 3 In the drawing area.rvt. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. select Callout. double-click the reference callout tag head. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. c_express_workshop_details_start. select Detail View: Detail. adjust the detail view display settings. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and click OK. under Detail Views(Detail).The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Detail). for Name. enter Wall Base 1. 6 In the drawing area. click Modify to clear the selection. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 8 On the Design Bar. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . double-click Wall Base 1. 4 Right-click Detail 0. 5 In the Rename View dialog. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. and click Rename.

Model-Based Detailing | 33 .The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. This is the view crop region. bordered by a solid line. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.

click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. select As Underlay. right-click. under Graphics.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. 16 Click OK. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 14 In the drawing area. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click View Properties. for Display Model.

20 In the drawing area. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible.Brick on Mtl. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . typical details can easily be placed. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. If the crop region is enlarged. 19 In the Type Selector.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. By grouping detail components. Directly above the drawing area. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . on the Options Bar. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Components. Stud. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. type 1' 6''. and press ENTER.

22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. as shown. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 23 Using the same method. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 25 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. add the following detail components as shown. click Modify to end the command. and click Create Instance. expand Groups ➤ Detail.

4" Slab detail. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.28 Press ESC to end the command.

and Free End are selected. for Full Path.rvt. You can customize this list. Leader. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. click Training Files. c_express_workshop_details_start. in the type selector. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. click Keynote ➤ Element. map keynotes by material. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and under Keynote Table. 4 On the Options Bar.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. and verify that Horizontal. For more information about customizing a keynote database. and format keynote styles.txt. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. or instructions within a construction documentation package. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. In the next exercise. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. special notes. click Browse. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.

use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. a question mark displays. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . 9 Press ESC to end the command. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.5 In the drawing area. Keynoting | 39 .3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. 8 Click to place the tag. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 7 Click to place the leader arm. If no value has been specified. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. Either move the text inside.

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Keynote ➤ Material.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 13 Click to place the tag. 15 Select 07 21 00. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 16 In the drawing area. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. and click OK.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. 19 In the Type Selector. Click OK.Boxed. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Only the keynotes remain selected. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Click Check None. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Creating Details with Revit Architecture. legends. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 .All items within the selection display in red. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Select Keynote Tags. 17 On the Options Bar.

In this lesson. In this exercise. update the project information element properties. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . but for training purposes. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Update drawing sheet and project information. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Place views on drawing sheets. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. and modify and update the project sheet title block. you will create a sheet. Add labels to a title block.

a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. If necessary. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. click Training Files. scroll until the folder is displayed.rvt. 3 Click OK. In Revit Architecture. In the Project Browser. or in the element properties of the title block. Project Sheet Layout | 43 .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing.

click Modify to clear the selection. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. To zoom in and out. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. and click Rename. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. In this tutorial. 8 On the Design Bar.Unnamed. To pan. 9 In the Project Browser. roll the wheel. Click OK. Smith and press ENTER. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. For Name. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. enter Sections/Details. 7 Enter K. 5 In the drawing area. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. under Sheets(all). you can enter ZE to zoom out. 6 In the Title Block. right-click A602 . 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. double-click Checker. Then. hold down the wheel and drag. enter A602.4 Type ZR.

enter J. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Client Name. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 18 On the Options Bar. 16 Type ZR. enter 4/10/2008. The Family Editor opens. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. select the title block. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 15 In the Options Bar. enter Design Development. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. 20 Click and type Project Status. click Text. 13 Click OK. For Project Status. Smith. (Left) is selected. in the Type Selector. For Project Name. enter Freighthouse Flats. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. 17 On the Design Bar. select Text : 1/8''.

25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. select Label : 3/16''. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. add Project Issue Date parameter. and verify that (Top) are selected. and click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. as shown. to add 28 Using the same method.21 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. click (Load into Project). (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify to exit the command. 22 Using the same method. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. under Category Parameters. 23 On the Design Bar. and click. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 26 In the Edit Label dialog. as shown. click Label.

The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet.30 In the Reload Family dialog. click Training Files. place and modify a keynote legend. In this exercise. Next you will create. enter Keynote Legend .Project. representing the view or schedule. you will create. a viewport displays. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.txt. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. for Full Path. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. to a drawing sheet. click Browse. and click Yes. for Name. select Override parameter values of existing types. and under Keynote Table. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.

double-click A601 .Sections/Details. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. and click OK. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Legends. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. on the Appearance tab. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and drag Keynote Legend .5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. under Text. as shown. 8 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. clear Show Headers.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet.

displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. The keynote legend is visible. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .9 Press ESC to clear the selection. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.Project as shown.

Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet.Project. 19 Click OK twice. expand Detail Views (Detail). under Legends. at the bottom of the Filter tab. enter Keynote Legend . for Filter. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The Keynote Legend is now blank. and click OK. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. as shown. and click Properties. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. not keynotes.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. for View Name.Sheet. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. and click OK. right-click Keynote Legend . select Filter by sheet.

Title Sheet 1. 2 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. and then add and update a Drawing list. The view title with line displays below the viewport. as shown. The view remains selected. double-click A0 . and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser.The keynote legend is automatically updated. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing.

When you place a view on a sheet. and zoom in on the drawing list. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. or omit view titles from sheets. expand Schedules/Quantities. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. as shown. 6 Type ZR. by default. You can specify text attributes for view titles. 5 In the Project Browser. define the information to include in a view title. The drawing list remains selected. Press ESC to clear the selection. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. As part of a construction document set. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. Revit Architecture displays a view title. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. 3 In the Type Selector.

while pressing SHIFT.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click the selected sheets. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. The drawing list display is updated. under Identity Data. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . under Sheets (all).Ceiling Plans. clear Appears In Drawing List. including only sheets that contain views. select A602 .Sections/Details and select A801 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. and click Properties.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. the wall or column will move with it. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a curtain wall. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. a central service core. For example. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. After the beginning exercises. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. If the grid moves. it is good practice to test the constraints. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. As you develop the building design. 57 . When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial.

West. views. click Training Files. In views that display elevation markers. verify that the second option is selected. In the drawing area in the right pane. and customize the project as necessary. The new project opens. you will use the default template.rte. 3 Under Template file. South. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. with an RVT extension. notice four elevation markers. you load any required family type that is not in your project. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. under Projects. To create the project file. 2 In the New Project dialog. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. In practice. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. levels. you use a template that is provided with the software. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. and settings. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . For this project. and residential. construction. but contains no geometry. and click Browse. click New. 5 Click OK. such as a door or window. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. East. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. from the product library. The project is stored as a single file. Creating the Project In this exercise. select Project. you design inside the elevation markers. under Create new. locate the Project Browser.

You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. and delete them. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. you will want to save your work frequently. As you design and document your building model. and on the General tab. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. Families. 16 Click Save. duplicate them. verify that Project Files (*. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. and duplicate levels. Ceiling Plans. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). delete. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South. Creating the Project | 59 .rvt) is selected. Groups. and elevation views created in the project by the template. notice the Legends. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Sheets (all). You can add. 15 For Save as type. expand Views (all). The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. These views are customizable: you can rename them. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. such as schedules and legends. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 14 For File name. view the Save reminder interval. 8 Under Floor Plans. then expand Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. content and building model reports. Two level lines. 13 In the file window. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. and families in your project. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. display in the south elevation. heights. NOTE If you create a project without a template. sheets. enter Revit Retail Building. Schedules/Quantities. 7 If necessary. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. double-click Metric. schedules. and other properties. change their properties. and click Training Files. will be accessible from the Project Browser. reflected ceiling plan views. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all).Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. created by the template. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. the view you see in the drawing area. as well as change their names.

Adding Project Levels on page 60. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. to each other. You change the names of the 2 default levels. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. expand Views (all). enter 00 Foundation. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. When you begin designing. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. and press ENTER. doors. After you modify the two default levels.17 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. the other levels move and change with it. You learn how the levels are locked. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. and windows within the building model. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. so that when one level moves. and double-click South. or constrained. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser.

enter 0. click Level. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. and press ENTER. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. not all the tabs are visible. 13 On the Options Bar. When you add the new level. and press ENTER. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. This is the Options Bar. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. and click OK.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. As you move the cursor. (You do not have to click to specify the start point.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. and then move it up. If it does not. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. Adding Project Levels | 61 . right-click. which should display by default. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 14 Click Plan View Types. and press ENTER. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. view the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. Next. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. enter -1800. and press ESC. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. enter 01 Entry Level. and click Basics. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 16 Enter 3750. By default.

and for Offset. using a different option. and move it slightly upward. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. or on the Design Bar. click Level.18 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 3. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 26 Press ESC. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. and enter 02 Level. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. you add another level. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. click (Pick Lines). click Modify to end the command. Next. 19 Click OK. enter 3750. If you create a level by copying it. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. and rename the corresponding views. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. under Floor Plans. 25 Click to place the level line. click Rename. 21 In the Project Browser.

Adding Project Levels | 63 . all the levels move. Notice that by moving the top level.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. If you select a level and click its lock. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and you can move them independently. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown. the levels are no longer constrained. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise.

In a later exercise. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. specify a start point for the grid line. the column height changes as well. Move the cursor up. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. click Modify. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. 3 On the Options Bar. so that if the roof elevation changes. On the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 00 Foundation. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. select (Draw). In the following exercise.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When the grid is complete. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. and specify the grid line endpoint. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. under Floor Plans. click Grid.

Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and for Offset. On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. click (Pick Lines). and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. Enter A. Click to place the grid line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and click to place the line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Grid. enter 7500 mm. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. for Offset. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and click to place the line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. Next. enter 4500 mm. enter 7500 mm. for Offset. On the Options Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. and click to place the line.

click Grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. as shown. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 11 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. click Grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1.8 Press ESC. On the Options Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint.

click Dimension. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 15 Starting with grid line A. click Dimension. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 21 Press ESC twice. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. select grid lines C and 3. 18 On the Design Bar.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Aligned). 22 While pressing CTRL. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing.

30 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New. The pins are hidden. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. until it is closer to grid line 5.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click Modify. and press ESC. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. enter 50mm. click the value for Center Segment. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. until it is closer to grid line A. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 31 For End Segments Length. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .5mm Bubble with Gap. 33 On the Design Bar. enter 6. and press ESC. and select None. 29 In the Name dialog. At the left endpoint of the grid line. 26 In the drawing area. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. (Element Properties). 32 Click OK twice. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. click and drag the blue circular grip up. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. Two pins display on the grid lines. and select grid line A. click . 24 Press ESC. select grid line 5. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. By pinning these central grid lines. If necessary. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. and on the Options Bar. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. click Modify.

5mm Bubble. and press ESC. click (Grid Intersection). Creating a Column Grid | 69 . For Place By. and on the Options Bar. select Grid : 6. select Grid : 6. 35 In the Type Selector. and in the Type Selector. select all of the grid lines. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. 36 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Finish. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). The original continuous grid lines are restored.5mm Bubble with Gap. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. click Structural Column. 37 Select the grid lines again. 39 In the Type Selector. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

select grid line A. 45 While pressing CTRL. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. If it is unlocked. 43 Press ESC. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. and unlock it. click Activate Dimensions. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. Next. click Camera. 47 Enter 9000. for From. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 48 On the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 46 On the Options Bar. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 52 On the Options Bar. select 01 Entry Level. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. lock it. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B.

54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click to place the target point of the camera. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

Adding Beams on page 72. under Views (all). displays in bold under 3D Views. and then copy them to subsequent levels. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 57 Proceed to the next exercise. The current view. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. In the Rename View dialog. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. When you finish adding beams. and click Rename. Adding Beams In this exercise. enter To Building. and click OK. named 3D View 1 by default. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. expand 3D Views. Right-click 3D View 1. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level.

under 3D Views. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. The selected grid lines display as red. 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Beam. the icon on the right side of the scale. 8 While pressing CTRL. 4 Click Medium. 7 On the Options Bar. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . click Finish.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The view is currently set to Coarse. 9 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Create Beam On Grid). 6 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. view the icons on the View Control Bar. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. Adding Beams | 73 . select each grid line.

under Floor Plans. click Modify. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click Select All Instances. select 02 Level. press and hold SHIFT. right-click. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 14 Select one of the beams. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View toolbar.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. select 06 Roof. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. click (Default 3D View).

Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. right-click. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. and click Select All Instances. under Instance Parameters. view the Top Level parameter. 22 On the Options Bar. When you created the columns. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. (Element Properties). and if necessary. Adding Beams | 75 . and click OK. right-click. 21 With the column selected. double-click To Building. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. select 06 Roof. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click 24 Press ESC.to the 5th level. resize the view to see the entire structure. 20 Click Cancel. under Constraints. All of the columns display as red. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. under 3D Views. and click Element Properties. 25 In the Project Browser. 06 Roof. for Top Level.

NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. double-click South. 28 Save the drawing. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. as lines only. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. under Elevations. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. but you want to display them in less detail. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.

click Framing Elevation. double-click 00 Foundation. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. and press ESC to end the command. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces | 77 . 3 On the Options Bar. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser.29 Proceed to the next exercise. To better add the braces to the structure. Adding Braces In this exercise. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. under Floor Plans. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. Adding Braces on page 77. you create 8 framing elevation views.

You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. The associated framing elevation view displays. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. double-click the elevation marker arrow. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 8 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click Brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. click to specify the start point of the brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. press ESC twice. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 11 Using the same technique. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . but when placed the braces are placed. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. After you add the final brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level.

Adding Braces | 79 . and press ENTER. enter 18000 mm. delete it and redraw it. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. The height of the roof lowers.

and press ENTER. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. but this time add them from right to left. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. enter 10000 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. 14 On the Standard toolbar. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. under Floor Plans. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure.

and on the Options Bar. NOTE As you add braces. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). double-click 00 Foundation. as shown in the 3D view below. 21 Select grid line A.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. Adding Braces | 81 . click Activate Dimensions. under Floor Plans. 23 In the Project Browser. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. and press ENTER. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 19 In the Project Browser. enter 12000 mm.

Creating a Foundation on page 82. lock it. under Elevations.24 In the Project Browser. beams. grid size. under Floor Plans. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. and if necessary. double-click South. and drag it away from the structure. Test connectivity of the columns. click and roof height. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. double-click 00 Foundation. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 31 Save the drawing. under 3D Views. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. double-click {3D}. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 26 In the Project Browser. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Creating a Foundation | 83 . 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. and press ESC twice. and expand Structural Foundations. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. In the View Range dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Extents. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. The foundation pile cap now displays. and how to load specific families into a project. and click View Properties. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. for Level. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family.Before you can add the pile caps. click Training Files. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. click Edit. After you load the pile cap family. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. for View Range. under View Depth. select Unlimited. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. and drag it to the drawing area.rfa. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. expand Families. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. The pile cap has been added in the view. 9 Close the warning dialog. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. Click OK twice. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. A warning displays.

When the final pile cap is placed. press ESC twice. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. and click Create Similar. under 3D Views. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.

Changing Structural Member Types | 85 .rvt. double-click {3D}. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. You load new column. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. and brace families into the project. and click Select All Instances. 2 Select one of the columns. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. you change the types of the columns. beams.14 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. under 3D Views. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. All columns in the building model display as red. and braces that you used to create the building structure. beam. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser.

for Type. you change the brace type. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 15 In the Project Browser.3 In the Type Selector. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 6 In the Type Selector.6X15.2X101. click (Element Properties). You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. The brace type changes. click Edit/New. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. for d. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. the braces as well as the beams change. 17 While pressing CTRL. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. and changing its size parameter. 19 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. right-click. In the following steps. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. 18 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate.5CHS. 16 On the Design Bar. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. double-click Elevation 1-a. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. 10 On the Options Bar. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .9. The building model displays the round hollow columns. click Brace. click Modify. enter 75mm. and click Select All Instances. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 7 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 9 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. This not the size that you want to use. enter 75mm. click Modify.

Linking the Structural Model on page 87. select m_RRB_structure_complete.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . click Training Files. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Auto . the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model.rvt.rvt. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 Under Positioning. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. After the files are linked. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog.Origin to Origin. and click Open.

under Elevations. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. and click Select Link. select the linked Revit model. select Levels 00 through 06. click Copy. 6 In the drawing area. however. click (Copy/Monitor). structural members. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. 8 On the Options Bar.4 In the Project Browser. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. and walls could also be copy/monitored. 9 In the drawing area. In this case. depending on the project. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. After the link is established. Grids. select Multiple. 5 On the Tools toolbar. while pressing CTRL. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South.

click Finish. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. 15 In the New Plan dialog. click Finish mode. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. click OK. and click Delete. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. while pressing SHIFT. First. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. right-click Level 1. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. delete the Level 2 floor plan. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. for Floor Plan views. 18 Using the same method. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06).10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 16 Click OK.

select the Topography : Surface. click OK. right-click. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. for Name. enter Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans.19 In the Project Browser. 24 In the New View Template dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. double-click 00 Foundation. 25 In the View Templates dialog. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Floor Plans.

29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. select Floor Plans. 34 In the 3D view that displays. double-click Site. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. click Camera. and click OK. under Names. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . under Floor Plans. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and railings are also created from sketches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. To create floors. and click Rename. Adding Floors on page 92. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click 3D View 1. Adding Floors In this exercise. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. In this exercise. Some other Revit Architecture elements. such as roofs. 36 In the Rename View dialog. expand 3D Views. stairs. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. click Training Files.35 In the Project Browser.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter To Building.

select the top floor line. click (Rectangle). Adding Floors | 93 . under Floor Plans. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. and elements in the current view display as gray. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. past the first vertical grid line. At the top left corner of the grid. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. and then the first horizontal grid line. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. click Floor. On the Sketch tab. Move the cursor to the left. Leave this dimension unlocked. You are now in the Sketch Editor. On the Options Bar. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. click Dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. Do not lock the dimension. click Lines. If the grid changes size. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid.

At the top left corner of the grid. and change their values to 300 mm. select the top floor line. and click the temporary dimension value. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press ENTER. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. They display on the floor sketch. click Modify. Enter 300. Select and lock the dimensions. Do not lock the dimensions. Move the cursor to the left dimension. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and then press ESC.

double-click 02 Level. click Lines. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. click (Pick Lines). using a different sketching technique. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. click Floor. On the Options Bar. and for Offset. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. and on the Options Bar. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. Select the three remaining floor lines. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. click Edit. enter 1500mm. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. click Quit Sketch. on the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. under Floor Plans. On the Sketch tab. Next. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. and press ESC. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. and lock the dimensions.8 Select the floor. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. Adding Floors | 95 .

under Floor Plans. click (Align). 14 On the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor displays. and a lock icon displays. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. click Floor. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. double-click 03 Level. click Finish Sketch.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 17 On the Sketch tab. 18 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click (Rectangle). The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active.

25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Adding Floors | 97 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. select 05 Roof Garden. 32 Select the floor. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. and lock the edges. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level.24 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. under Floor Plans. click Edit. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. double-click {3D}. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Views ➤ 3D Views. under Floor Plans. 35 On the Sketch tab. and on the Options Bar. Alternatively. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Finish Sketch.

To create the roof. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. double-click 06 Roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. and press ENTER.rvt. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. enter 1800 mm. Click (Pick Lines). click to place the roof line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Lines. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. When a blue dashed line displays. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 3 On the Design Bar. Adding a Roof on page 98. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. ■ ■ For Offset.

for Offset. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). and when the blue dashed line displays. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 300 mm. click to place the roof line.6 Select grid line 5. Adding a Roof | 99 . 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). move the cursor slightly below the grid line.

click (Trim/Extend). and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep).10 Press ESC. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. select the roof. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Roof. ■ 12 On the Design Bar.

on grid D. click Section. click Modify. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. for Elevation. Adding a Roof | 101 . 17 On the Design Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). and click to specify the section. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. and press ENTER. move the cursor down below the roof.14 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. enter -100 mm. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

20 On the Design Bar. for Structure [1]. 24 In the Project Browser. for Structure. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click 06 Roof. click Edit/New. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. (Element Properties). 30 Click OK 3 times. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. select the roof. and on the Options Bar. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. select Variable. In section. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click Edit. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. under Construction. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. under Floor Plans.

41 Starting with the left front edge. zoom in to the roof. In this case. click OK. click (Default 3D View). select each edge.Roof Edge. select the section line. and press DELETE. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. select Fascia : Fascia . 38 In the 3D view. Adding a Roof | 103 . 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 40 In the Type Selector. 33 In the warning dialog. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.31 On the Design Bar. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. on the View Control Bar. moving counter-clockwise. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. 37 If necessary.

View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. the curtain wall resizes with it. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add a curtain wall. click Modify. double-click To Building. so if you resize the grid. under 3D Views. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104.42 On the Design Bar. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise.

click to place the first curtain wall segment.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you duplicate a type. and move it slightly toward the building interior. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. Click OK twice. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Retail Storefront. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. For Offset. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Under Vertical Grid Pattern. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. For Height. for Spacing. The type is saved in the project. Under Construction. For Level. click Duplicate. enter 600 mm. click 01 Entry Level. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). select 01 Entry Level. click Wall. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . enter 2100 mm. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. for Join Condition. enter 1050 mm. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. click Training Files. for Spacing. 6 In the Name dialog. and click OK. for Type. select 05 Roof Garden. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 3 In the Type Selector.

but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. so they remain in the view. 15 On the View Control Bar. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. If the grid moves. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. If you want to hide them. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 On the Design Bar. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and trim each curtain wall segment. click Dimension. double-click To Building. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you can delete the dimensions. under 3D Views. click (Trim/Extend). and lock the dimensions. These dimensions are not in a sketch. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid.

rvt. Creating an Entrance | 107 . You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Creating an Entrance on page 107. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Views (all). 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. as these usually represent internal pilasters. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 Under Visibility. click All. All the elements in the list are selected. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 7 Click OK. clear one element to clear all the elements. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under the element list. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. and double-click South. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 6 Under Visibility. Do not select Columns. and click None. 2 On the View Control Bar.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Model Categories tab.

If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. in this case an architectural elevation. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 109 . double-click {3D}. 12 With the panels selected. select Architectural Elevation. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. in the Type Selector. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 18 On the View Control Bar. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. select System Panel : Solid. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 10 Select 1 panel. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. press and hold CTRL.9 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. click Modify.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). under 3D Views. double-click South. double-click To Building.19 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the front of the building.

23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 24 On the Options Bar. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Type Selector. and click to select it. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). Creating an Entrance | 111 . click Modify. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. select another mullion to the right. and unpin it. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. select One Segment. click Curtain Grid.

press TAB until it is selected. and unpin it. click (Default 3D View). 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. and view the new entrance. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. select it. 34 On the View toolbar.

Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. open the North elevation. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . and 4th panels.38 Press DELETE. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 39 Using the same process. 40 Optionally. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

and click View Properties. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. for Underlay. select 02 Level. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Right-click in the view. click Training Files. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. 5 Click OK.

9 In the Project Browser. The cursor changes to a pencil. select the grip closest to the callout head. and click Rename. enter Display Area. and click OK.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. which indicates you must draw the callout. and click to complete the callout. under Floor Plans. 8 Select the callout. 10 In the Rename View dialog. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. click Callout.

Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Section. and click Flip Section. 12 Draw a section line. 16 Select the section box. 14 Press ESC. 13 Select the section line. right-click. as shown. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level.

135mm Partition (2-hr). and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. Click (Rectangle). 25 Press ESC twice. double-click 01 Entry Level. 18 In the Rename View dialog. select Basic Wall : Interior . 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 27 On the Options Bar. select Wall faces. For Loc Line. click Dimension. expand Sections (Building Section). click (Align). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 21 In the Type Selector. 26 On the Design Bar. enter Section Display Area. 24 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. and click Rename. select Finish Face: Exterior.17 In the Project Browser. Lock both alignments. click Wall. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . right-click Section 1. for Prefer. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser.

click Ceiling. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. and lock the dimension.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 38 On the View Control Bar. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. and lock the dimension. double-click Section Display Area. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. under Ceiling Plans. 32 In the Type Selector. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. under Sections (Building Section). 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 37 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. Next.) 36 Press ESC twice. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces.

under Constraints. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. under Sections. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Element Properties). ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. and click OK. for Height Offset From Level. 43 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. 46 Press ESC. 41 On the Options Bar. and click (Element Properties). click Attach. 47 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. click to select it. click Modify. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . and click to select the walls. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. under Ceiling Plans. Select the 02 Level Floor. and click OK. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. for Base Offset. under Constraints. press TAB until you select the wall chain. for Top/Base. and click to select the walls. enter 2700 mm. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2700 mm. double-click Section Display Area.

under Ceiling Plans. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Rotate). click Cancel. click Cancel. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Type. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit/New. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Edit. 54 Click OK.49 In the Project Browser. 58 On the Edit toolbar. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. view the ceiling structure. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. and click . under Construction. for Structure.

and press ENTER. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. enter 45. 61 Press ESC.60 Click.

double-click To Building. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. click Shadows Off. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 66 Optionally. click Shadows On. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. under 3D Views. 64 On the View Control Bar. 65 On the View Control Bar. 67 Proceed to the next exercise.

You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. enter 1500 mm. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click to create a reference plane to the right.rvt. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. click Training Files. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. and for Offset. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and copy it to the 05 Level. under Floor Plans. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and click to create a reference plane to the left. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. Move the cursor over grid line B. double-click 01 Entry Level.

click Modify. click Stairs. 6 Select the left reference plane. C. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. shorten the right reference plane. 2. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. and 3. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. 7 Using the same method.

■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 12 In the Type Selector. beyond the end of the stair. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. The complete stair displays. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. including its handrails. and select the 2nd reference plane. select Basic Wall : Generic .225mm Masonry. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. and specify a point. Click (Rectangle). select Finish Face: Interior. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. Move the cursor down. click Wall.

Click Modify. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. for Prefer. Lock the dimension. click Dimension. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Select the wall. and press ENTER. Select the bottom of the stair. click Align. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar.15 On the Tools toolbar. enter 1200 mm. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 18 Using the same technique. select the dimension value. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. and lock the alignment. Select the interior face of the wall. and click to select it. select Wall faces. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. and specify a point away from the wall.

a warning displays. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. 27 In the Type Selector. TIP To flip the door swing. clear Tag on Placement. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . select both reference planes. 28 On the Options Bar. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. and press DELETE. (Undo). click Door. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. 25 While pressing CTRL. 24 On the Standard toolbar. and press DELETE. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 23 Select the stair. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. The stair and walls move to the left.21 Select the dimension. Because the dimension is constrained.

For Top Constraint. click 36 On the View toolbar. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. but if you view the top level of the building. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 33 Select the stair. for Base Constraint. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. for Multistory Top Level. select all 4 walls. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Constraints. 35 On the View toolbar. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. select 05 Roof Garden.30 On the Design Bar. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 00 Foundation. (Element Properties). and move the cursor to spin the building model. (Rectangle). 44 On the Tools toolbar. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. (Default 3D View). Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click OK. Click OK. (SteeringWheels). under Floor Plans. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. click Align. click Modify. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw).

51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. on the View toolbar. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. (SteeringWheels). 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and click OK.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. click (Default 3D View). and lock the alignment. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. and lock the alignments. click see the roof.

for Base Offset. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. and click OK. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. 56 Select the shaft. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. click 59 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. double-click 01 Entry Level. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. (Default 3D View). select Up to Level: 06 Roof. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. For Top Constraint. (SteeringWheels). By offsetting the base. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties).55 In the Project Browser. enter 300 mm. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. under Floor Plans. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level.

click Wall. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Underlay. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Graphics.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. select 06 Roof.rvt. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click in the view. and click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. and then select the right face of the wall. and on the Options Bar. 15 In the error dialog. click (Align). 11 In the Go To View dialog. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. and press ENTER. enter 9750.225mm Masonry. and click (Fillet arc). 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. click Edit Profile.5 In the Type Selector. and click Open View. select Elevation: South. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . 17 On the Options Bar. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click Remove Constraints. The exact placement is not important. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click .

and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. click Finish Sketch.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. 22 In the Project Browser. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. double-click {3D}. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . and click (Circle). as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click .

create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.4. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Basics tab. and press ESC twice. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 .rvt. under Floor Plans. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. TIP After you place the 1st planter. click Component. select Planter : 1220 x 1220.5 Meters. click Component. double-click 05 Roof Garden.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. as shown. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. select M_RPC Tree . between grid lines C and D. 6 In the Type Selector. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. click Training Files. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. 17 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. 14 In the Name dialog. 15 In the Type Properties dialog.5 Meters. click (Default 3D View). 18 In the Project Browser.8 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click {3D}. select M_RPC Tree . 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm. 16 Click Apply. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. click Duplicate. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. For Offset. enter Japanese Cherry 1. as shown. (Element Properties). View the roof. and then click OK twice. enter 2400 mm. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Dimensions. 21 On the Design Bar.5 Meters. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the 2 remaining trees. for Type. double-click 01 Entry Level. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Select one of the trees. click Lines. under 3D Views. click Floor. under Floor Plans. and in the Type Selector.

for Offset. and click to place the line. and click to sketch a line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 25 Using the same method. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. and click to sketch a line. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 0 mm. click (Draw). 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 26 On the Options Bar.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.

35 Select the line that you just drew. 32 Press ESC. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to finish the line. move the cursor up 900 mm.30 On the Options Bar. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Trim/Extend). 34 On the Tools toolbar. and click to finish the line. clear Chain. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B.

click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. near Column E5. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter -250 mm. a photorealistic image displays. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. under Constraints. In plan view. 39 Select the sidewalk. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. When you render an image. select M_RPC Male : Alex. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. enter Sidewalk. 49 On the Options Bar. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 45 Click OK. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rotate after placement. Next. The completed sidewalk displays. 43 Click OK twice. 48 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. click Component. 42 In the Name dialog. as shown: (Element Properties). The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight.38 On the Design Bar. for Height Offset from Level. click Edit/New. for Type. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. click Duplicate. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . and click so he is facing the column.

about 30 degrees. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 54 In the Type Selector. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). and click (Element Properties). and click to place her on the sidewalk. click the car. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 52 In the Type Selector. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. select M_RPC Beetle. 56 Press ESC twice.NOTE If necessary. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. click Camera.

under Elevations. for Offset. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. 66 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. 65 Click the sidewalk. and click OK.59 In the Element Properties dialog. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. 63 Click the sidewalk. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. click Pick Host. enter -300 mm. 64 Select Alex. under Constraints. 60 In the Project Browser. Next. double-click West. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and on the Options Bar. If the sidewalk changes height. When you select a host for a component. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. click Pick Host.

the elements will be ungrouped in the project. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. 68 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and replace them with a service core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . After the service core is positioned.

walls. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. click (Default 3D View).rvt. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. 5 On the View toolbar. you delete the entire stairwell. 4 Press DELETE. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. and shaft opening.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . click 6 On the View toolbar. 3 Select the entire stairwell. including the stairs. click Training Files. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. (SteeringWheels). double-click 05 Roof Garden.

Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and notice that the linked file is listed. expand Model. and zoom in to the linked instance. click Training Files. 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. 14 In the Project Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. expand Groups. 13 In the drawing area. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. click (Align).rvt. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click OK. and click Create Instance. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. right-click m_RRB_core. and on the Design Bar.

click Ungroup. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the core. 17 On the Design Bar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. 20 On the View toolbar. or if the group layout is expected to change. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . ■ ■ Click grid line C. click 21 On the View toolbar. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. and click to align the center. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. (Default 3D View). click Modify. (SteeringWheels). and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click (top down view).

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files. where it is hosted within a railing family. you add glass railings around the floor edges. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. After you modify it.

double-click 02 Level.rvt. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . The rendering displays.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. 5 Expand Railing. click OK. click Training Files. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 13 On the Tools toolbar. click (Split). and expand Railings. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. Handrail only. press and hold CTRL. and on the Options Bar.rvt. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Edit. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. expand Families. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. The floor sketch displays. expand Renderings. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. and Parapet. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 3 In the Conference project. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and select Glass. and click to split the floor. and open Metric\m_Conference. in the Project Browser.

select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. verify that Chain is not selected. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. click Lines.15 On the Design Bar. and click to draw another line. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 24 On the Tools toolbar. and on the Options Bar. click (Align). 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and click to draw another line. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 Select grid line B. click Modify. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it.

click (Align). click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. and lock the alignment. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 31 In the Revit dialog. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click Dimension. 33 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . click Finish Sketch. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. and click OK. click Railing. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. For Offset. for Type. and click the lock to lock the alignment. select Glass. enter 100 mm. Lock the dimensions. 30 On the Design Bar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown.26 Select grid line D. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click Railing Properties.rvt project.

39 Click Finish Sketch. click Dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .37 On the Design Bar. click Camera. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension.

■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. exterior fire stairs. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. lofty ceilings. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and a roof garden.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. NOTE For training purposes. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. 153 . balconies. slight modifications to the building design have been made. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District.

154 .

section. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn how to create new views from existing views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. how to create section and elevation views. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. 155 . you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model. including plan.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 8 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 4 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. select Level 2.

right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. Next. under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan. click the current scale.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 14 On the View Control Bar.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.

select 1:100. click Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Elevation: Building Elevation. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. for Scale. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .

select 1:100. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). ■ Move the cursor down. click Section. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. under Elevations. 15 On the Options Bar. for Scale. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 In the Type Selector. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click South East.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. select Section: Building Section. and double-click Level 1. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. enter South East. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .

Click the midpoint of the section line. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. and click to place it. click Split Segment.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.

click Modify. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 24 Select gridline F. using the blue circular drag grip. 23 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Building Section).21 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. and double-click Section 1.

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. click Modify. To create each view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Creating Callout Views | 167 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans. select Floor Plan. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Resulting callout view . 4 On the Options Bar. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select 1:50. double-click Level 1. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. click Callout.rvt.

6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and select the callout boundary. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. ■ Select the middle grip. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.

click Modify. 13 In the Type Selector. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays.7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. under Sections (Building Sections). double-click Section 1. Creating Callout Views | 169 . select 1:50. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. for Scale. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. 9 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 14 On the Options Bar. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail.

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

and click OK. Creating Callout Views | 171 . expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.

rfa. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. the elevation markers. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. select Custom-Section Head. double-click Level 1. open Metric\Families\Annotations.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans.

Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. enter Section Head – Custom. and click OK. On the floor plan. click the Annotation Objects tab. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. for Section Head. 22 In the Name dialog.Filled. and click OK. scroll to Section Line. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and select 2. click Duplicate. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and can be applied to the section line. 17 Under Category. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . Section Tail – Filled. and click OK. 10 On the floor plan.5mm Square. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. scroll to Section Marks. clear any others. 12 For Section Tag. click Duplicate.Custom. select Section Head . 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and select 3. 4 On the Design Bar. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 15 Under Category. select the section line. . select the current project. enter 12. click Load into Project. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. Section Tail .The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 19 Click OK.

5 mm. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 34 In the Name dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. For Corner Radius. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. enter 6 mm. and on the Options Bar. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 40 Press ESC. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. for Callout Tag. select 3. 36 In the drawing. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. and on the Options Bar. clear all others. and click OK. On the floor plan. Click OK. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Project. For Line Weight. notice the square elevation markers that display.5mm Square. and click OK. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. select 12. enter 12. click Edit/New. select the current project. 39 Click OK twice. For Dimensions ➤ Width. for Elevation Tag. Click OK. 27 Click OK twice. select Square. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 30 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. select Custom-Callout Head. click Edit/New. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select the callout. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. . . click Duplicate.23 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click Training Files. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog.

Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click the Annotation Objects tab. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. view regions. 49 Click OK. 43 Under Category. filters. scroll down to Callout Boundary.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 45 For Line Pattern. expand Callout Boundary. select Dash. and select 7. and visual overrides. You learn to create view templates. and select 4. 46 Under Category. masking regions. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog.

2 On the View Control Bar. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. click Zoom to Fit. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. click (Hide Crop Region). 6 On the View Toolbar. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 5 On the View Control Bar. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click Training Files. under Elevations. click (Show Crop Region).rvt. and apply it to multiple elevation views. To accomplish this. The crop region displays as red.Creating a View Template In this exercise. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click East.

grids. 13 On the View Control bar. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. clear Entourage.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Under Visibility. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. Callouts. levels. under Visibility. Creating a View Template | 177 . and section lines are now hidden in the view. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. elevation markers.

edit the crop region as before. 15 In the New View Template dialog. right-click North. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. double-click North. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 17 In the Project Browser. click OK. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 20 Using the same method. and click Create View Template From View. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Elevations. and click OK. click Apply. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 16 In the View Templates dialog. and click Apply View Template.14 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click East. and click OK. under Elevations.

Under View Depth. for View Range. for Level. right-click. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. for Bottom. select Level Below (Level 4). 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. under Extents. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . select Level Below (Level 4). Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Click OK twice. select Penthouse. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.rvt. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

and click Properties. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Level 4. double-click Roof Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. for View Range. click Edit. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Roof Plan. Under View Depth. select Level 4. right-click. Click OK twice. for Level. under Extents. for Bottom.

click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 10 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. select Unlimited. 16 On the Design Bar. click Plan Region. select Unlimited. 13 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. Move you cursor diagonally. Click OK twice. 11 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. In the left corner of the building. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . for View Range. click Edit. Under View Depth. for Bottom. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. under Extents. for Level.

click Modify. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. in this case. 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Views (all).rvt.17 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. After you apply the filter. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. click the Filters tab. the fire rating of the walls. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.

12 On the Filter tab. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Solid Fill. click Add. under Basic colors. enter Rated Walls. under Filters. select Walls. 7 In the Filters dialog. 17 Using the same method. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . select Fire Rating. 11 Select Rated Walls. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. 9 Click OK. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. for Pattern. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. Enter Hr. 16 Click OK. for Rated Walls. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Remove. 5 In the Filters dialog. 14 In the Color dialog. under Categories. and click OK. click <No Override>. and click OK. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click Override under Patterns. for Color. click (New). select the red color. click Edit/New. Select contains. and apply a color.

you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. To accomplish this. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you obscure geometry in portions of a view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. as shown. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.rvt. right-click. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. select Invisible lines. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. click Masking Region. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. under Floor Plans. 8 Select the crop region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region. 9 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. 7 On the View menu. and click OK. Masking Portions of a View | 185 .Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Rename.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown.12 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click Override.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. for Color. click <No Override> to apply a color. click black. select Solid fill. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. for Pattern. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . 11 Click OK twice. select Walls. click the current scale. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click 1: 50. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.rvt. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click Unit 18 Plan . You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. under Visibility. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. right-click. 7 Under Cut. click in the Patterns field. under Pattern Overrides. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click.

Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify. and click OK. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Floors. under Visibility. 16 Under Visibility. clear Grids.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .

under Lines. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. select Dash. click Projection Lines. select the sofa. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 25 Click OK twice. click Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Color. right-click. for Pattern.20 Right-click. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click a purple color. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. By using the previous method to make the selection. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color. 23 In the Color dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.

30 On the Design Bar. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. right-click. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click .28 For Color. 29 In the Color dialog. and click OK twice. select a bright green color. click By Category Override. 32 Select one of the lamps. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.

Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click .33 On the View Control Bar. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save.

The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. select A0 metric. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and click OK. right-click. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.Creating Sheets.rvt. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and click View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. click Sheet.

For Sheet Number. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and select the title block. 7 On the Design Bar. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . click Modify. enter A101.Unnamed. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click Modify. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. For Sheet Name. Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 5 When the title block highlights. enter Site Plan. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar.

enter For Approval. For Project Status. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. under Other. enter 15 May. For Client Name. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. enter 2009-1. The new project information displays in the titleblock.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter Freighthouse Flats. MA 12345 12 Click OK. For Project Name. enter J. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. Smith. 2009. 14 Click OK. For Project Number. for Project Address. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit.

enter Floor Plan. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Elevations A107 .Sections A108 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click Rename. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click OK. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . select A0 metric.Elevations A106 . select the new sheet name. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. and click OK. 17 In the Project Browser. you add views to these sheets.Layout Plan A104 . you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. right-click. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. for Name. and click Save.Stairs In the following exercise.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Elevations A105 .

under Sheets (all). and click to place the view. 2 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . under Sheets (all). drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Floor Plan. under Floor Plans.rvt.Elevations.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click to place it. double-click A104 . click Modify. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A102 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays. select Level 1. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.

drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. align it with the East elevation. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). click Modify. double-click A107 . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet.Sections. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 12 On the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar. move the cursor over it. zoom in to the grip. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. for View Scale. . and click OK. 16 Select title bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. select 1:5. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. and press TAB until it highlights. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click A108 . 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click to place it. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 18 Under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. under Sheets (all).Stairs.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser.

3 At the right end of the Roof level line. enter 16700 mm. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click A107 . and press ENTER. 5 On the Design Bar. right-click.rvt. and click Activate View. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.Sections. 2 Select the building section view. under Sheets (all). you must first activate the view on the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. In order to do this. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. click Modify. and then make changes and deactivate the view.

rvt. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click North. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. After you create the sheet. and click Deactivate View.6 Right-click. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title.

click Camera. For Sheet Name. The camera view displays. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. and click Properties. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. double-click Level 1. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select A0 metric. select the new sheet name. right-click. enter T. enter Title Sheet. 7 Place the camera as shown. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 .Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser.

enter 1500 mm. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 11 On the View Control Bar. Under Camera. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Extents. enter 18000 mm. For Target Elevation. for Eye Elevation. Click OK. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Far Clip Offset. select Far Clip Active. 13 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. double-click T .8 On the Options Bar. enter 100000 mm.Title Sheet. under Sheets (all). drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on.

and click OK. Click Apply. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. enter 635 mm. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.15 With the view selected. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Under Model Crop Size. and on the Options Bar. enter Viewport/no title mark. under Graphics. click Size. 24 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. 25 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). click Modify. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. . for Show title. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . click Duplicate. 19 Select the view on the sheet. select No. 22 In the Name dialog. for Height.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan.rvt. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because of the open style floor plan. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. 207 . Tagging Objects In this lesson. You also learn to create different types of schedules. such as room and window schedules. click Training Files. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. such as doors and windows.Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans.

as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown: 5 Using the same method. and click Room and Area. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. click Room Separation. move the cursor to the right.

6 Using the same method. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 In the Tags dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. click Load. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. click Modify.

The room tag number displays in blue. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. type 2400 mm. and select the room tag. click it. verify that Tag on placement is selected.rfa. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click Modify. 14 For Offset. indicating that it can be edited. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. type U18-1. 13 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. and click to place the room and tag. click Room. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK. click Training Files.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.

Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. type Entry. click Modify. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Room.18 Click the room text label. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. Sequential letters are also supported. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 22 Click the room text label. and press ENTER. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Using the same method. place rooms and tags. Click to place the new room and tag. and press ENTER. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Dining. type Kitchen.

25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan . on the Model Categories tab. clear Room Separation. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. expand Lines. click Modify. but they need to be tagged. click Room Tag. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and moving clockwise. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). The rooms are already placed. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. 29 On the Design Bar.

rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. in the Project Browser. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.Level 1. you learn how to place door and window tags. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. clear Leader.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 105. select Corridor. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. select Storage. type Building Entry. The room Number is U17-46. For 103. for Name. 11 Using the same method. add 5 more rooms. type Storage. for room 101. next to Rows. and press ENTER. 10 Edit the number to be 101. 101-106. click New. For 104. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. type Corridor. For 102.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt.■ For 106. you add room separation lines. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. and modify room names. expand Lines. 4 Click OK twice. In the Line Graphics dialog. click the bright green swatch. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Floor Plans. under Visibility. select 9. For Room Separation. 13 Save the file. place rooms from a program list. click Override. For Weight. type Stair. and press ENTER. under Projection/Surface. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the Lines field. Under Custom colors. click the Lines field. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click the Color field. double-click Level 1.

draw the horizontal line. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. First. click Modify. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 9 On the Design Bar.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room. click Room Separation.

12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). type 2400 mm. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 For Offset.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. for Room. for Room.

Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 19 In the Project Browser. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. place the following rooms. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . click Modify. and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. double-click Room Schedule.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 20 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 17 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. double-click Level 1. 16 Using the same method. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.

21 On the Options Bar. under Category. and click OK. and click OK. Floor Finish. select Base Finish. and for all 3 finishes. type Units. 27 Select Schedule keys. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Rows. under Available fields. clear Room Bounding. click 23 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). and Wall Finish. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. click Schedule/Quantities. under Constraints. 24 Open the Room Schedule. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 For Key Name. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add. click New. type As Selected. while pressing CTRL. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Rooms.

for Room Style. select Units. under Other. for Fields. and click OK. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Filter Selection).32 Using the same method. under Identity Data. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. double-click Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. under Floor Plans. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 33 In the Project Browser. 44 On the Options Bar. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 42 On the Options Bar. for Available fields. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 Click OK twice. click Check None. 38 Under U17-8. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. select Room Style. right-click Room Schedule. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. for Room Style. click Edit. click (Element Properties). Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . and click Properties. 43 In the Filter dialog. 37 Open the Room Schedule. and click OK. select Rooms. select Units.

at the warning prompt. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). and click OK. select Room Style. for Name.rvt. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.46 Open the Room Schedule. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. type Room Type. click the Color Scheme field. type Room Type. and double-click Level 1. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. under Graphics. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. select Service. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. and 106. For rooms 102 and 105. for Color. 103. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click OK. and click Properties. select Public. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. under Views (all). 104. expand Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. and apply it to the Level 1 view. click 5 For Title. 48 Save the file. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. (Duplicate). under Floor Plans. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click Level 1. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser.

19 On the Options Bar. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. click the value in the Color column. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. and click OK. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. expand Lines. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Edit Color Scheme. click Color Scheme Legend. under Visibility. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Visible. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Edit. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schemes. and clear Room Separation. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. select the color legend. 14 Click OK twice. 17 On the Design Bar. select Room Type.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

on the Options Bar. type 5 mm. for Size. type 25 mm.22 In the Color dialog. 24 Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. under Custom color. under Graphics. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 23 Using the same method. click Modify. click Edit/New. 28 Under Title Text. respectively. select blue. for Swatch Width. (Element Properties). change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 29 Click OK twice. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected.

for Color Scheme. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. select Room Type. select Rooms. and click OK. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. double-click Building Section. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Color Scheme Legend. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Edit. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. under Sections. under Sections.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and select Properties. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. 35 Click OK twice. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. right-click Building Section. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. under Visibility.

and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). select all the rooms in the stairwell. (Filter Selection). click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. select Units. 42 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. under Identity Data. 45 While pressing CTRL. under Identity Data. select Public. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Check None. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Rooms. 46 Click . click .40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. for Room Style. and click OK. for Room Style.

Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Style Schedule. select Service. under Identity Data. and click OK. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. type Suites. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 .Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Key Name for the new row. for Rows. excluding the stairwell spaces. under Schedules/Quantities. click New. 51 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. and click . select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 54 While pressing CTRL. for Room Style.

55 Click . select Suites. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. and click OK. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. under Volume Computations. but not beyond it. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. The color fill will extend to the roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. under Identity Data. and click OK. select Areas and Volumes. 59 Under Room Area Computation. verify that At wall finish is selected. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The color fill extends to the roof. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style.

for Upper Limit. under Constraints. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . 67 On the first level. for Upper Limit. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 Click . type -254 mm. 70 For Limit Offset. select Level 2. select the stairwell room. select Loft. type 0. 71 Click OK.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level.0. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 64 In the Element Properties dialog. the dining room. and the living room. . click Modify. 66 Click OK. 72 On the Design Bar. under Constraints.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. double-click {3D}. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .73 Save the file. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.

5 On the Design Bar. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 3 While pressing CTRL. and click Add. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . Clear Itemize every instance.Insulation on Plywood Deck . and click OK.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Select Grand totals. select Material: Description. 4 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. click Family and Type. click Modify. under Available fields. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. 9 Using the same method.EPDM. For Then by. select Family and Type. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. under Category. select Roofs.

for Fields. and under Fields. click Edit. 20 For Formula. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. under Other. for Material: Cost.40 50. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. click the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals. 21 Click OK. click Estimated Cost. type Estimated Cost. Under Field formatting. 12 Click OK. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 23 For Field formatting. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. select Material: Area. for Name. under Available fields. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Calculate totals. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. and click OK twice. and click Properties. and click Add. select Material: Cost. 19 For Type. select Currency. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2).

you create an exiting plan for the building. 27 In the Format dialog.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. adding the shared parameters to a family. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . tag the line. 30 Click OK twice. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. 28 For Unit symbol. either within family components or within the project template. not just for currency. You draw a travel path line. for Currency. 31 Save the file. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Digit grouping. In this lesson. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. regardless of category. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. and schedule the total distance of each path. select $. 26 In the Project Units dialog. creating a generic tag to tag the family. and are defined and stored in an external file. 29 Select Use digit grouping. These shared parameters can be added to any family. The cost fields are formatted correctly. you create a shared parameter file. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. for Rounding. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. and reporting the shared parameters. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. which inserts commas after every three digits. click the Format value. can be used for any number-based parameter.

6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.rvt. click Create. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. click New. 9 Under Parameters. and click OK. under Groups. click Training Files. for Name. click New. select Length. type Travel Distance. and click OK. 11 Click OK twice. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. type Path ID. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.txt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Type of Parameter. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. under Floor Plans. click New. 7 Under Parameters. type OfficeStandardsParameters. for File name. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. type Exiting. and click Save. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. for Name.

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. click Load into Projects. and click OK. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. following the equals symbol (=). under Parameters. and click OK. and click OK. 15 If necessary. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. select Constraints. Click Training Files. group it under Dimensions.rvt. under Dimensions. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 13 Click Apply. for Travel Distance Formula. click Family Types. 14 On the Design Bar. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 3 On the Design Bar. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Shared parameter. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and click OK. click Add. 11 Click OK. under Parameter Type. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 4 In the Family Types dialog. type Length. click Add. in the Load into Projects dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 8 Select Instance. and click Select. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Parameter Data. and select Instance.rfa. otherwise the family loads into the current project. If you have multiple projects open. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 10 Using the same method. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. under Parameters. for Group parameter under.

click Training Files. 24 Click OK twice. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click parameter(s) to label). 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. select Travel Distance. click Label. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. under Category Parameters. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Select. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click (Add Parameter). under Parameters. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. click Label. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.rft. select Travel Distance. (Add 26 On the Design Bar.

so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.rfa. and click OK. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 33 On the Design Bar. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. for File Name. and press DELETE.rvt is selected. click Modify. type M_Travel Distance Tag. 32 In the Save As dialog.28 On the Design Bar. select Path ID. and click Save. click Load into Projects. 29 In the drawing window. and move it down. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 35 Save the file. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.

under Floor Plans.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.Level 1. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Tagging. 6 Move the cursor to the right. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. After the lines are tagged. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.Placing. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. double-click Exiting Plan . click Component. select Chain. above the exterior door as shown. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and click in the center of the corridor. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.

and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . click Modify. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner. verify that Chain is selected. 17 On the Options Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Component. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. double click Exiting Plan .Tagging. 13 While pressing CTRL. clear Leader.7 Move the cursor down. through the door. for Path ID. under Floor Plans. click Modify.Level 2. type 1-1. select the 2 dashed travel lines. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. and click outside of the building. and click (Element Properties). click Tag ➤ By Category. Placing. under Constraints.

and click. move the cursor to the left. click Component. and click in the stair. and click above the door to the stair. 23 Move the cursor down. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 21 On the Design Bar. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

click Modify. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. 30 Using the same method. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. for Path ID.24 On the Design Bar. Placing. under Category. under Constraints. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Tagging. type Level 1 Exit Distance. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. click Tag ➤ By Category. type 2-1. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 For Name. click Modify. . verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . 28 While pressing CTRL. 32 In the New Schedule dialog.

in the third field. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and under Field formatting. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 38 For Sort by. 42 Click OK. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. and click OK. 50 Save the file. in the first field. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. click Training Files. in the second field. while pressing CTRL. type 2-. for Filter by. 44 In the Project Browser. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. select Path ID. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. select contains.rvt. for Filter.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and in the third field. select Path ID. click Edit. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 35 Click the Filter tab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click Add. 49 Click OK twice. and click Rename. 41 Under Fields. under Schedules/Quantities. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Travel Distance. select Path ID and Travel Distance. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. under Available fields. 36 For Filter by. 43 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. type 1-. 46 In the Project Browser. type Level 2 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Calculate totals. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance.

Partitions ➤ C1010100 . select Walls.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 4 Under Available fields. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . and select C1010145 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 10 In the schedule. click the Fields tab. click the Value field.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 9 Click OK twice. under Identity Data.152 mm. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Partitions . select the following fields. under Categories. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. for Assembly Code. and click .Fixed Partitions. expand C .Interiors ➤ C10 . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click View.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Generic . and click Properties. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click the Design Bar. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.

12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 8 In the New Database dialog. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access.mdb). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Under Directories. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Training Files. and click Next. under Database. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. for Database Name. click Create. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database.mdb. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. type Revit_Project. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK to create the database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and click Next. the database display may be different than that shown. 6 Click Finish. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click the File Data Source tab.11 Close the exercise file. 1 On the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 Click OK 3 times. click OK. select a location for the database file. 3 Click New.rvt. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source.

and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. 13 Close the exercise file. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. Additionally. For example. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. in addition to the Id column. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements.

262 .

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. 263 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

These components display at the required scale. plywood. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. In the callout view. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. In order to detail from the building model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. 297 . like a standard door header condition. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and metal studs. add detail components. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you trace over the building model geometry.

2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 5 In the alert dialog. Exact location is not important. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. They are also view specific. which means that all detail components. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. After you add components. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and use the model as an underlay for the detail. and insulation objects. double-click the detail callout head. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 7 In the drawing area. and click OK. click Detail Component. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. You load detail components.rvt. and click Open. region objects. select As underlay.Detailing the View In this exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The roof overhang detail displays. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as well as detail lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you detail the view of the roof edge.rfa. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.

click Modify. click Edit/New.8 Delete the component. 13 In the Name dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click Duplicate. click (Element Properties). Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 17 In the drawing area. for Pattern ➤ Detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Repeating Detail. and click OK. 16 Click OK twice. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Detailing the View | 299 . 19 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. select Corrugated Metal. enter 406. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.5mm. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.

and click Open. click Detail Component. ■ ■ Click Modify. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click Load. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Training Files. 24 In the Type Selector. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 22 On the Options Bar. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.

Because you still have several components to load. you load them as a group from a single file. click OK. 31 To properly orient the component. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. 33 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR 3 times. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. and place it in the detail view as shown. Detailing the View | 301 . 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Training Files. and click Open. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 29 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.

select Chain. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. and click Modify. click the Flip instance arrows. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Click Modify.

For Offset. enter 140mm. as shown.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. click Insulation. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. select to near side. 42 Click Modify. Detailing the View | 303 . Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. ■ Click Modify. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click (Move). click Detail Component.

48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 2 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. they are view specific. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you add lines to your detail. 51 Click Modify. meaning they display only in this view. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 47 In the Type Selector. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. as shown.rvt.45 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Like detail components. select Thin Lines. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. and lock the component.

as shown. For Offset. click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).4 Click Modify. 7 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . select Medium Lines. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. select Thin Lines. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. as shown. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. click Detail Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar.

15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and clear Chain. select Chain. click (Draw). as shown. 16 On the Options Bar.

18 In the Type Selector. For Offset. enter 10mm. When you turn the display model off. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . and press ENTER. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Detail Lines. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 26 In the Type Selector. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 24 On the View Control Bar. select Vapor Barrier. 22 In the Project Browser. Click (Pick Lines). select the Penthouse level line. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. select Thin Lines. draw the detail lines as shown. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. right-click. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select Do not display.

32 Click Modify. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you add text notes to complete the detail. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it.29 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes on page 308. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 30 In the Type Selector. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes In this exercise.

Enter the text. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. Click again to specify the location of the text box.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 2 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Text. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. 6 Click Modify. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. click Dimension.

clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and click the dimension text. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.. and click OK. click Roof Overhang Detail. under Text Fields. and click Rename. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. select a text note. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 3 In the Rename View dialog. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click 6 In the Filter dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. right-click. (Filter Selection). Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click. right-click. and save the exercise file. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. enter Typ. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. for Suffix. and press DELETE. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Creating Detail Components on page 310.7 Select the dimension line. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click OK. on the Options Bar. click Select All Instances.rvt.Keynotes. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. Creating Detail Components In this exercise.

7 Click Modify. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog.rft. in the Type Selector. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and selecting the chain. 16 Click Modify. click Training Files. 14 Click Modify. and click Open. pressing TAB. while pressing CTRL. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. select all the coping linework. select Medium Lines. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 15 Use a window to select all linework.

click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click . and click Save. 26 Press DELETE. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. enter Roof Edge. 30 In the drawing area. delete the underlying linework. select the coping. 25 In the Filter dialog. clear Detail Items. and click OK. navigate to your preferred location. While pressing SHIFT. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 24 On the Options Bar. and click Open. click Load into Projects. 31 Using the same method used previously. 23 Using a window. click Load. click Detail Component. you place keynotes on objects. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.rfa. and the component can be placed in the detail. 28 On the Options Bar. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. click Training Files. Adding Keynotes on page 312. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The original linework remains selected.18 In the Save As dialog. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.Keynotes view is not the open view. 21 To place the component. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser. 27 On the Design Bar. for File name. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 22 Click Modify. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.

click Keynote ➤ Element. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. and click OK. Click to place the leader arm. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. 2 In the alert dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 6 Click Modify. (Element Properties). navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Roof Edge4.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. Adding Keynotes | 313 . navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.B5. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.D11. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.rfa.C1. and click Open. click Edit/New. For the metal coping. In the Keynotes dialog. 19mm Plywood. use keynote 07645. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 06160. 63mm Rigid Insulation.rvt.

use keynote 06110. and click . FasciaProfile_1. 11 Click OK 3 times. click Keynote ➤ Element. 17 Keynote the component. For the 50 x 300. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.D1. navigate to 07645.20 Ga. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.A8. 15 In the Type Selector. For the 50 x 150.I1. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. use keynote 09250. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.F1. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 50 x 200. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. use keynote 06160.D11. 12 On the Design Bar. using keynote 07460. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. use keynote 06110. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.F1. click Detail Component. 18 Save the file. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. use keynote 06110.9 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. 22mm Corrugated Steel .G1. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select Corrugated Metal. You do this in order to keynote the component.

Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. select Medium Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. 5 In the drawing area. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Open. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 11 Press DELETE. 15 Click Modify. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. click Training Files. click Training Files.rft. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. click Detail Component. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 22 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. 19 In the Name dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click OK 3 times. for File name. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify. and select the right end point. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Save. click Edit/New. select the left end point of the reference line. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. select Medium Lines. 9 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). navigate to your preferred location. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 6 Lock the line. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Lines. click Load. 16 Select the component. 13 In the Type Selector. and click Open.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click Duplicate.

click Edit/New. name the component Air Barrier. click Duplicate. 29 In the drawing area.A5. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click in the Value column. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 44 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 47 Select the component. 49 With the component selected. 48 Using the same method used previously. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. enter EPDM Membrane.A1. 31 Select the component. and hidden) used in the view. 46 Click Modify. and click . You add the components to the project and keynote them. 34 In the Name dialog.25 Next. on the Edit toolbar. invisible. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 41 Select the component just added. select m_Light Line Detail Component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . name the component 50 x 200 Framing. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. and click the lower end at the break line. 42 Using the same method used previously. 28 In the Type Selector. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. and assign it keynote 07260.G1. and click . click Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. click (Move). and click OK. and assign it keynote 06110. against the 19mm plywood. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. and click . 37 Click OK 3 times. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 40 Click Modify. 38 On the Design Bar. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and click . click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify.

53 On the Options Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 52 In the Type Selector. leaving the detail component lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 55 Click Modify. click Detail Component. select Chain.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar.

select Invisible Lines. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . in the Type Selector. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. select the component.rfa. click Keynote ➤ Element. 50 x 200 Framing.58 Using the method used previously. 68 In the drawing area. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 60 On the Design Bar.A4. 61 In the drawing area. and assign it keynote 07260. click Detail Component. 63 In the drawing area. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. and Vapor Barrier. click Load into Projects. name the component Vapor Barrier. 67 In the Type Selector.rfa. Air Barrier.

5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and assign it keynote 07210.. and press ENTER. and press TAB.A4. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.rvt.69 Select the component. and press TAB. 3 In the text editor. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. under Keynote Table. and close the text editor.A9. name the component Batt Insul. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. click Browse. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 70 Using the method used previously.A1. and click . The database file opens in a text editor. 72 Save the file. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 71 In the drawing area. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. Enter 07460. Enter 07463. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319.txt. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. add a keynote for the component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. under Path Type. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 11 Click Modify. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). navigate to 07463. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click Open. you learn how to create a drafted detail. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. After you create a drafting view. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. In the Type Selector. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK. Each keynote displays as a simple number. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes.A1. and click OK. 9 In the drawing area. and click to place the note. select Absolute. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 14 Save the file.txt. click to place the leader. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 13 Click Modify. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. select all the keynotes. click Keynote ➤ Element. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing .6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog.

select Black and White. The detail that you import is in DWG format. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.dwg. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 6 In the Project Browser. Click Open. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 .Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. click Training Files. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. The detail is imported as an import symbol. For Positioning. select 1 : 5. For Colors. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. and click OK. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. enter EPDM Metal Coping. right-click Drafting 1. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail.rvt.Center to Center is selected. and click Rename. for Scale. verify that Auto . and click OK.

click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. select Reference other view. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).No Reference. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Click OK twice. enter Detail . and click Properties. and click OK. 5 Click Modify. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 6 Select the callout. delete the existing value. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 10 In the Rename dialog. click Edit/New. for New.

The callout is updated with the sheet information./Det.Elev. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. double-click A105 . Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 18 Save the file. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all)./Sect. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. and double-click the callout.No Reference). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 .Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. click Modify. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail .

and click OK. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for Name. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Gyp. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. enter Header @ Sliding Door. click Filled Region. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. . 14 Click OK 3 times. 11 In the Name dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Region Properties. and click OK. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. Board. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. for Name. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. select Gypsum-Plaster.

Draw a rectangle as shown. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the width dimension. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . select the left and bottom edges of the region. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 18 While pressing CTRL. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. select Wide Lines. 20 On the Design Bar.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click 22 On the Options Bar. click (Draw).5mm. click . 19 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. and enter 20. click Finish Sketch. (Mirror). 17 Click Modify.

click Filled Region.Finish.Finish.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. and click OK. enter Wood . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Select the mirrored region. click Duplicate. select Wood . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. for Name. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Move the cursor up. 33 Click OK 3 times. 30 In the Name dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 Click Modify. . 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click above the top of the region as the end point. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click Region Properties. click Edit/New. 29 In the Type Properties dialog.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. Draw a rectangle as shown. click .34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 39 In the Type Selector. 37 On the Design Bar.5mm. sketch the new region as shown. select Medium Lines. click Finish Sketch. click (Align). Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. select Medium Lines. and select the right edge of the wood region. in the Type Selector. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. verify that the thickness is 19mm. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click Filled Region. 38 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region.

Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 46 On the Tools toolbar. (Align). For Offset. and press ENTER. enter 6mm. 47 Click the reference plane. click Finish Sketch. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click 48 Click Modify. For Offset. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Filled Region. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region.42 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. click Ref Plane.

click (Trim/Extend). For Offset.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor left 25mm. and select the bottom horizontal line. 54 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. 56 On the Design Bar. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Select Chain. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. enter 0. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and press ENTER. Move the cursor down 305mm.

68 Click Modify. select the height dimension. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. enter 76. top. 69 Select the bolt. select Medium Lines. click Training Files. enter 3mm. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Detail Lines. click Detail Component. For Offset.2mm. click Load. 62 Select the left detail line. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 65 On the Options Bar. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. and right edges of the door panel region.rfa. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 61 Click Modify. 60 Select the left. and click Open. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 58 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.

use the images as a guide. 74 Select the expansion bolt. click Detail Lines. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 71 On the Options Bar.70 On the Design Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. and click Open. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. click Training Files. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Wide Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 .rfa. click Load. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 76 In the Type Selector.

and on the Edit toolbar. 87 Click Modify. click . 85 On the Options Bar.78 On the Design Bar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 79 In the Type Selector. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click . click Detail Lines. (Mirror). select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 84 On the Design Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 80 On the Options Bar. 82 Select the rectangle.

and on the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). 90 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 89 On the Design Bar. 92 Select the line. as shown. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

select the length dimension. 99 Click Modify. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 101 On the Design Bar. 97 On the Options Bar.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. select M_Break Line. 95 On the Design Bar. enter 3mm. click . Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 103 Add two break lines as shown. click Detail Component. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. and click to place the arc as shown. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 102 In the Type Selector. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

drag the text for the smaller dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 110 Select the dimension line.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area. and click Modify. 106 Click to place the dimension. 107 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. using the Drag Text grip. and click Modify. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 108 In the Type Selector.5mm Arial. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.

5mmArial. 114 Click OK. under Dimension Value. enter See Schedule. and click the dimension text. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 118 Select Modify to end the command. and enter Varies. select Replace With Text. 113 Under Text Fields. and then click the dimension text. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. click Dimension. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . under Dimension Value.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. select Replace With Text.2. for Below. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar.

and click Modify. 126 In the drawing area. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 128 Select the note. and on the Options Bar.121 Click OK. select the gypsum board region on the left. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 123 Click OK. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 127 Enter Gyp. click Text. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . click to create an arced leader. Board. and click to place the text. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 125 In the Options Bar.

click Modify to end the command. 132 Save the file.131 On the Design Bar. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

rvt. 339 . you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. click Training Files. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial.

8 Select the keynote.rfa. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 7 On the Design Bar. for Number of Leaders.Hexagon. click Symbol. type 1. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 5 On the Options Bar. click Modify.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Training Files. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

and click above the tag to place the copy. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. on the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit toolbar. click (Element Properties). click (Copy). type Seal existing doors and insulate. 13 Select the tag. Creating a Note Block | 341 . under Identity Data. and click OK. for Text.

position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 17 Click OK. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. click (Element Properties). 16 For Tag. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. (Mirror). on the Edit toolbar. 19 With the tag selected. 15 For Text.14 With the copy selected. on the Options Bar. type B. click Copy. type Repair existing door surround. and on the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click. 18 Using the same method.

Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair existing door surround. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 22 Optionally. Tuckpoint as required. Clean exterior brick wall.21 On the Design Bar. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Remove all existing windows. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. and moving counter-clockwise. click Modify. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Repair as required. using the table as a reference.

under Available fields. 27 In the column header (text). for Sort by. and for Alignment. Clean cut and repair wall as required. select Exterior Construction Notes. format. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. type Exterior Construction Notes. select Tag. and click OK. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. type Description. On the Appearance tab. Select Text. and click Add. On the Formatting tab. 29 In the Project Browser. select Tag. and drag it to the sheet.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. 28 In the Project Browser. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Note block name. 26 Click OK. for Heading. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and double-click A103 . verify that Arial is selected. for Header text. select Center. Create. type Mark. expand Schedules/Quantities. expand Sheets (all). and click Add. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. for the value.Elevations. type 6 mm. and select Bold. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

under Sheets (all). double-click T .31 On the Design Bar. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.Title Sheet. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.

346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Filter by. for Sort by. select Sheet Index.Title Sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number. in the second field. under Available fields. 7 In the Project Browser. The drawing list displays. under Sheets (all). and click Add. in the first field. select does not equal. ■ 4 Click OK. double-click T . On the Filter tab. type T. select Sheet Number. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. Select Sheet Name. select Sheet Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. 5 In the list title field. and click Add.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and in the third field. and drag it to the sheet.

On construction documents. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. For the text. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally. and so on). and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. windows. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Training File Using Legends | 347 . Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 11 Save the file. click Modify. doors.9 On the Design Bar. door frame schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. and door frames. On construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference.

click Text. select Arial. click Symbol. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click . and click OK. type 3mm. 9 For Text Font. for Name. and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Duplicate.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. type Legend Text. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. click Edit/New. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.rvt.Open Level Head .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you create a text type with the necessary size. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 For Text Size. type Typical Symbol Legend.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. for Name.

Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 16 In the Project Browser. 14 Working from the top down. expand Legends. click Typical Symbol Legend. and for Leader. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. verify that is selected. and click to place it. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 .Site Plan/Floor Plan. expand Sheets (all).

and click to place it. select Viewport : No Titlemark. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.17 In the Type Selector. 23 Save the file. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet.Unit 18. double-click A102 . under Sheets. click Modify. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 19 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. and click OK. click Legend Component. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. For View. For Host length. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. select Section. 5 On the View Control Bar. type 4th Floor Wall Types. and press ENTER. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. type 900 mm. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select 1 : 50. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. for Name. 3 For Scale. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Medium for Detail Level.

verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the second wall. and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click Text. click to add text without a leader. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 13 On the Options Bar. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Leader. click Modify. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. for Family.

17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. under Floor Plans.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 23 In the Project Browser. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click OK to accept the default titleblock. right-click Sheets (all). select Level 4. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 19 Type the following text. click to add text with a single-segment leader. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . and click New Sheet.

The open drawings are both visible. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types.25 In the Project Browser. drag it onto the sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 29 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. double-click Level 4. click Modify to end the command. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. under Legends. under Floor Plans. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 26 On the Design Bar.

The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select the Wall Type 2 component. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 34 Select the patio divider wall. 35 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click (Match Type). 33 In the floor plan view. select Detail Level: Medium. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.

You can create a sequence of revisions. These changes can be due to owner requests. or changes in building material availability. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. click 37 Save the file. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. In this exercise.36 Optionally. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. under Floor Plans. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. contractor inquiries. Using the table. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract.rvt.

verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. type a date. the revision is locked and issued to the field. verify that Per Project is selected. for Numbering. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. If you select Per Sheet. 5 For Description. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. In general. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. yet as concise as possible. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . When you use this option. if the active revision is number 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 7 Under Show. When Issued is selected. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. In most instances. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. For example.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. If Visible is not selected.

5 Select the divider. 6 On the Design Bar. you make changes to the project floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Save the file. 3 Select the divider. 4 On the Edit toolbar. move the cursor up. click Modify. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. including revision number and revision date.rvt. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. double-click Level 4. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. click (Move).8 Click OK. Revision clouds have read-only properties.

click Finish Sketch. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click near the partition you moved. 8 In the drawing area. select Snaps Off.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . 11 On the Design Bar. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. and click OK. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. In the Snaps dialog.

15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 16 Click OK. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. click the Annotation Objects tab. select 6. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Line Weight. you load a revision tag into the project. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 17 Save the file.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.

2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. click OK. and because the revision is the first in the project. double-click Level 4. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Tags dialog. 6 Click Load. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click Training Files. 11 Click to place the tag. click Tag ➤ By Category. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. click Tags. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.rfa. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.rvt. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. you need to add one. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Working with Revisions In this exercise. select Leader. 12 Save the file. 8 In the Tags dialog. scroll down to Revision Clouds. under Floor Plans. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Because you chose to number by project. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You then issue a revision.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the drawing area.

double-click A107 .rvt. you prevent further changes to the revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. and click OK. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. with the description Relocate Door. You can continue to add revisions. and enter a date. and enter a date for the revision. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Click OK. 7 For Description. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. click Add. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.Unnamed. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. you can no longer modify it. under Sheets. 8 Add another revision row. You do this by issuing the revision. select Issued. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. type Modify Paving Area.

Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. select Revision Cloud. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 15 On the Options Bar. select Tag ➤ By Category. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. select Seq. under Sheets (all). for Revision.Unnamed. apply Seq. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. select the revision cloud. 2 . 11 On the Drafting tab. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. 17 Using the same method learned previously. 3 . 19 To add tags.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. click to add a revision clouds. 13 Click Finish Sketch.Modify Paving Area. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 12 In the drawing area. double-click Level 4. 10 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Project Browser.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. in the drawing area. double-click A107 . click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. Working with Revisions | 363 .

you edit the titleblock family.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. select Alphabetic. for Numbering. select the titleblock. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. beginning with "D". You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . delete the first 3 characters. For each revision. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. and rotation) to the revision schedule. 26 In the drawing area. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 25 Click OK twice. You do this so that the revision can be changed. for Sequence. Click Options. clear Issued. height.

under Other. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. for Appearance. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Edit. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and click Properties. Select Outline. click Modify. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. click Edit Family. and drag it above the schedule area. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. click Load into Projects. 33 Select the schedule header. and press DELETE. right-click Revision Schedule. click Yes. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area.27 On the Options Bar. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Bottom-up. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Yes. 28 In the alert dialog. Working with Revisions | 365 . 34 On the Design Bar. Select Grid lines. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. for Build Schedule. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Clear Blank row before data.

right-click Revision Schedule. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. enter Rev.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. under Other. for Rotation on Sheet. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. select the revision schedule. 46 Click OK twice. 40 Select the revision schedule header. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. open the titleblock family for editing. 45 On the Appearance tab. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog.. When the height property is variable. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. select User defined. and click Properties. for Formatting. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. click Edit. select 90° Counterclockwise. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. With a user-defined height. for Height. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. for Heading. and on the Options Bar. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. and the most current revisions display in the available rows.

click Load into Projects.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 51 Save the file. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. click Yes. you learn to import information (such as images. text. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. Importing from Other Applications | 367 .

you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Title Sheet. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.Importing Image Files In this exercise.JPG. double-click T . click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click T .rvt. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 5 On the Design Bar.Title Sheet. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. for Leader. click to add text without a leader. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. click Modify. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Sheets. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. and place it on a sheet. click Text. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Importing Text Documents In this exercise.

Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 11 Save the file. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. with the new text box still selected.doc text file in another window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 6 Select the text.

NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.Unit 18. 12 Save the file.xls. and click Save. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.mdi. 1 In the Project Browser. for File name. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. double-click A102 . under Sheets. click Desktop. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.rvt. 5 Click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.JPG. This process may vary from system to system. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. type Fixture Schedule. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 10 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. click Modify. This step has been completed for you.JPG. 4 Under Printer. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . This exercise demonstrates a common method. click File menu ➤ Print. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. for Name. select the document writer. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.

To effectively document this project. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. called dependent views.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The large floor plan. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. as well as a large lab building. 371 . you break up the plan into sections.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.

under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. right-click Level 2. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. and the model crop is the interior crop region.Aviary. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. enter Level 2 . 6 In the drawing area. The dependent view opens. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. for Name. 5 Click in the drawing area. and click Rename. double-click Level 2.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. select the crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.

right-click Level 2. 13 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 .Labs. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.10 Click in the drawing area. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 15 Select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 14 Click in the drawing area. for Name. click Zoom To Fit. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout.

click Matchline. click Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Zoom flyout. under Floor Plans.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 19 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). double-click Level 2. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . 18 On the Design Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 20 Click in the drawing area. click Modify.

378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. and click. 24 On the Design Bar. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

and click OK.Aviary. 31 In the Project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . for Line Weight. 28 For Line Pattern. click Level 2 . and click Rename. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click the Annotation Objects tab. 33 In the Project Browser. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. select Double Dash. and click OK. select 9. 27 Under Matchline. enter Level 2 Aviary. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. right-click A101 . and drag it onto the sheet.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Unnamed. under Floor Plans. for Name. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. expand Sheets.

and place the Level 2 . Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click View Reference. under Floor Plans. 39 On the Options Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. click Modify. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 .35 On the Design Bar. for Target view. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Labs dependent view on the sheet.Aviary is selected.

Labs. 44 On the Design Bar. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 45 On the Zoom flyout. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 41 On the Options Bar. for Target view. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

48 Select the crop region. right-click. under Floor Plans. click (Show Crop Region). select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 49 If. 47 On the View Control Bar. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display.46 In the Project Browser. after modifying the annotation crop region.Aviary. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. click the far right control. double-click Level 2 .

select all views in the list. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. click Zoom To Fit. 51 On the View Control Bar. 52 In the Project Browser.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and click Apply Dependent Views. right-click Level 2. 55 On the Zoom flyout. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). 54 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 53 In the Select Views dialog. expand Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. under Floor Plans.

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Training Files. click Zoom To Fit. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.57 On the Zoom flyout. The matchline is already placed in the view. and double-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. right-click South Elevation.

4 In the Rename View dialog. enter South Elevation . 5 In the drawing area. expand South Elevation. 3 In the Project Browser. enter South Elevation . for Name. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 9 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . click (Hide Crop Region).Left. cropping the view to the aviary. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. select the Crop Region. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click Rename. 11 Select the crop region. and drag it toward the center of the view. 10 In the Rename View dialog. cropping the view to the lab building.Right. and click OK. 7 On the View Control Bar. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. right-click South Elevation.The dependent view opens. and click Rename. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click Modify. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View on page 403.

Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Camera. The perspective view displays.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.

and select the crop boundary. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. and click Show Camera. Depending on camera placement. right-click 3D View 1. in the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. If the camera is not shown in the view.3 Zoom out. and adjust the field of vision. under Floor Plans. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. as shown. double-click Site. as necessary. With the camera shown. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view.

Day to open the view. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. and click Rename.6 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Save the file. right-click 3D View 1.Day. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. enter Exterior . 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.

You then duplicate the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. modify render settings.Day. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.rvt. and render a daytime view of the exterior. c_Pool_House_in_progress. under 3D Views. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . double-click Exterior . Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.

see Re-orienting the Project on page 447.Santa Monica. enter Spring Equinox . under Background. 5 In the Rename dialog. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. NOTE If a background image is required. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You create a location and time for the rendering. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 8 Under Quality.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. 7 In the Rendering dialog. select Edit/New. for New. click (Show Rendering Dialog). For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. for Setting. select Medium. under Lighting. and click Rename. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Render. In this case. 3 In the Rendering dialog. select Sky: Cloudy. select Spring Equinox. for Sun. 6 Click OK twice. 3pm. You adjust cloud settings as required.

Click Save. click Export. 10 In the Rendering dialog.png). 13 Close the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. After the image is rendered. click Desktop. click Show the rendering. click Show the model. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog.9 In the Rendering dialog. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . select Portable Network Graphics (*.

16 With the Exterior . 27 In the Rendering dialog.Night view open. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.Flat Round : 60W . for Name. press and hold SHIFT. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. you duplicate the view and change the settings. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. select Exterior: Artificial only.Flat Round : 60W .Exterior . click New. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .Flat Round : 60W . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Scheme. under Group Options.Day.Day view to Exterior . dialog.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. To select a sequential list. click New. and click Artificial Lights. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Move to Group. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click Render. and select the last light.Night. under Lighting. and click OK. enter Pool Lights.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . click Dialog). 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK. for Name. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. select the first light. under Group Options. verify that Pool Lights is selected. enter Pool House Lights. add 30 :Sconce Light . right-click Exterior .120V to the Pool Lights group.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. under Ungrouped Lights.120V. and click OK. click OK. 25 Using the same method.Flat Round : 60W . under 3D Views. 22 Using the same method. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. on the View Control Bar. under Ungrouped Lights.Night. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior .

31 Close the Rendering dialog.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. and click OK. 32 Save the file. In this example. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 30 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. click Adjust Exposure. click Show the model. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. under Image. enter 4. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you change the brightness of the exposure. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Rendering an Interior View | 411 .

c_Pool_House_in_progress. render the views. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. and finally. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. Adding RPC People In this exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view.rvt.

4 In the Type Selector.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the figure. select RPC Female : YinYin. and place the component inside the pool house. click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ (Rotate). the person’s line of sight. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Component. Exact placement is not important. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Adding RPC People | 413 . double-click Level 1. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Parameters. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. In order to see the figure’s reflection. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. By default. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. click Edit/New. click Edit. select Cast Reflections. 12 Click OK 3 times. under Identity Data. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. for Render Appearance Properties. 14 Save the file. you can enable this option.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click (Element Properties).

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415.15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . click Camera. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

4 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.The perspective view displays. under Extents. under 3D Views. and click Properties. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. select Section Box. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.

11 In the 3D view. 9 In the Project Browser. in addition to the 3D view. select the section box. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click Level 1. In order to accurately adjust the section box.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click South. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 .

13 In the South Elevation view.12 In the floor plan view. right-click. 14 In the 3D view. size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. select the section box. size the box as shown. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

doors that contain windows or glass. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window.15 Maximize the 3D view. and render the interior view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. To create a daytime view. and curtain walls. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. 17 Save the file. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration.

clear Pool Lights. 8 In the Rendering dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Interior: Artificial only. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 Click Artificial Lights. you turn them off for this scene. You can specify a lower quality. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. for Setting. 3 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Rendering Dialog). The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. and click Rename. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. c_Pool_House_in_progress. select Draft. for Scheme. and click OK. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. under 3D Views. After these settings are established. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. under Lighting.rvt. right-click 3D View 1. click Render.Night. 4 In the Rendering dialog. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. enter Interior . 2 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 7 Under Quality. and click OK.

For more information on daylight portals. the daylight portals can be turned on. In this case. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. but the space will receive standard daylighting. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Render. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. 3pm. (Show Rendering Dialog).9 Close the Rendering dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For sunlit interiors. right-click Interior . Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. select Region. select Spring Equinox . By default they are turned off. The preset schemes are read-only. for Sun.Night. click Copy To Custom. select Edit. You create a view for the interior during the day. 13 In the Rendering dialog. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior .Santa Monica. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. select Curtain Walls. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. you must create a custom setting. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. for Daylight Portal Options. in order to turn on daylight portals. click 14 For Setting. for Scheme. 17 In the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Sun only.Day.

20 In the Rendering dialog. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. click Show the model. and on the Options Bar. enter 1. enter 10. under Image. select the column on the right. click Adjust Exposure. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. In the next steps. Click OK. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and close the Rendering dialog.18 In the Rendering dialog. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. For Saturation. click Properties). Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area.

click the dimensions for Size. for Resolution. You change the varnish setting. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection.22 In the Element Properties dialog. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. and click Render. clear Region. 26 Click Update Preview. For Width. For Amount. Click OK. For Rotate. For Bump. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and click OK. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select the crop boundary. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . select Printer. select Unfinished. select Based on wood grain. and on the Options Bar. select Wood. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. 23 With the column still selected.6. As size and DPI are increased. 30 In the drawing area. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 28 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. enter 5''. under Output Settings. the render time increases significantly. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. select High. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. 24 In the Materials dialog. add a bump map to create texture. click OK. enter 90. select Scale (locked proportions).

elevation. or section view. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. independent of the Revit Architecture software. but you can also define it in a 3D. The walkthrough path is a spline. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson.The rendered image displays. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. Usually. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. In a plan view. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI.

proceeds through the dining room. on the Options Bar. expand Views (all). TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. and double-click 1st Floor. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Walkthrough.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . and change unit formats as desired. verify that Perspective is selected. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use metric values. expand Floor Plans. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and open Common\c_Townhouse. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. click Settings ➤ Project Units. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.rvt. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown.

on the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Finish. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

14 Click . and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. If it is not. verify that Field of view is selected. click Edit Walkthrough. on the Options Bar. for Frame. and for Height. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 12 On the View menu. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. enter 9''.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. for Width. 16 On the Options Bar. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. enter 1. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 17 Click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 11 Under Change. and click OK. select the crop boundary. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). and select the crop boundary. 13 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. enter 16''. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 .

press ESC. and click OK. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. double-click 1st Floor. under Extents. clear Far Clip Active. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. click (Element Properties). click Edit Walkthrough.rvt. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. c_Townhouse. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans.The walkthrough plays. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

6 On the Options Bar. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. for Controls. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . 7 Click the third key frame position. and drag it to the location shown.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). select Path.

c_Townhouse. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. for Compressor. reducing the size of the image. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . or rendering. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. specifying the number of frames. If you are unsure of what option to use. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. for Frames/sec. 3 Under Format. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. under Walkthroughs. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you export the walkthrough. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. and click OK.rvt. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 9 To play the walkthrough. . enter 15. shading. and click Save. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. on the Options Bar. 2 In the Length/Format dialog.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. hidden line. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. The walkthrough is recorded. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Output Length. double-click Walkthrough 1. click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. for Model Graphics Style. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. select <Shading>. shading with edges. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second.

you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. In this tutorial. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. More specifically. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. 431 . Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.

expand Views (all). (SteeringWheels). and double-click 01 Entry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click shown. expand Floor Plans. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point.Courtyard View In this exercise. 4 On the View toolbar. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. click Training Files. click Camera. 1 In the Project Browser. A 3D view is created.Creating a Solar Study . and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view.

and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 7 In the Project Browser. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the File menu. 3 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . enter Solar Study . as shown. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 8 In the Rename View dialog. you create a section cutaway view. double-click 01 Entry. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.5 On the Design Bar. if necessary. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. click Section. expand 3D Views.Courtyard View. click Save As. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Modify.

double-click the section head. right-click Section 1. expand Sections. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Modify. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 6 To view the section. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 7 In the Project Browser. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click . (SteeringWheels). as shown. click 10 On the View toolbar. 11 On the SteeringWheel. and click OK. and click Rename. 13 On the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. you create a plan cutaway view. 4 In the Project Browser. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Rename View dialog. do not display many elements in 3D. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. In some cases.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 18 On the File menu. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. Typical plan views. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. and click Rename. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 On the View Control Bar. including the house. and click Rename. then Fine. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. then select Medium. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . and click OK. as shown. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. double-click 01 Entry. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. click Save. right-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. 17 To hide the section box. 5 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. under Floor Plans. click . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. so no shadows will be cast from these elements.

click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. as shown. as shown. so you can see into the building from the top. click Modify. click (SteeringWheels). 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.8 On the View toolbar. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 11 On the Design Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 16 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 15 Select the Roof.

Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. right-click {3D}. under 3D Views. and click Rename. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. click Save.17 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 21 On the File menu. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

For the Single-Day solar study. click click OK. click . single-day. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. USA. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select Los Angeles. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you specify the location. Los Angeles. click . For this study. For the Multi-Day solar study. enter Summer Solstice. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. date. or multi-day solar study. date range. you specify the location. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. and time. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study.Boston. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Solar Studies . 9 In the Name dialog. and click Duplicate. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. leave the slider at 50. and time range. expand Views (all). 10 Under Place. for City. expand 3D Views. CA. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 For Sun Position. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. MA. and click OK. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . USA is selected. Click the Single-Day tab. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. You can create a still. . The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 2 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study.

select December 22. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. confirm that Summer Solstice. click OK. Los Angeles is selected. enter 20 and press ENTER. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Clear Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 8 On the Options Bar. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. and click Duplicate. click Save. click . for Date. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 14 In this case. 7 On the Options Bar. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Los Angeles. and click OK. For Time Range. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . You can select the level to be used for shadow display. ■ For Time Interval. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 10 and press ENTER. 19 On the File menu. Los Angeles. 2008. click OK. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. select Winter Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. 2008. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. under Frame.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 16 In the Name dialog. for Sun Position. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. on the Single-Day tab. select June 22. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Under Frame. 6 On the View Control Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Winter Solstice.Courtyard View is currently displayed.

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. . under Floor Plans. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. click . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 14 On the Options Bar. approximately as shown. on the Single-Day tab. click . select Summer Solstice. 13 On the View Control Bar. . and click OK. The solar study animation plays. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. double-click 01 Entry. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. for Sun Position. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click . click Text. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click To play the animation from start to finish. . Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click To display the next sequential frame. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson.■ To display the next key frame.

click . 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. click Lines. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. Click and enter Dining. expand 3D Views. approximately as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. 8 For Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar. click . NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. On the Options Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

On the Annotation Categories tab. 11 To display the section box. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. as shown.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. and click OK. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. under Output Length. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click OK. ■ For Frames per second. On the Annotation Categories tab. verify that the value is set to 15. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the drawing area. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. select Section Boxes. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. on the Single-Day tab. Los Angeles. select Frame Range. select Summer Solstice. 15 To hide the section box. if necessary. 14 Click outside of the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. select the section box. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. and enter 5 to 50. clear Section Boxes. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. select AVI Files. For Files of Type. and click OK. To maintain the proportions of the frame. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. click OK. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. of the animation separately. and click OK. click . 3 For Sun Position. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. enter 450 in the first field (width). select Frame Range. you open each image. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. or frame. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.■ ■ Under Format. For Dimensions. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Output Length. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. and enter 5 to 10. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . verify that Hidden Line is selected. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. for Model Graphics Style. Under Format. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. on the Single-Day tab. 2 On the View Control Bar. For Frames per second. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. Los Angeles. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click OK. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. To view the animation. for Model Graphics Style. for Compressor. For File Name.Los Angeles. verify that Hidden Line is selected. select Winter Solstice.

as shown: 9 On the File menu. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. TIFF. select PNG. For File name. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. click Save.Los Angeles. Click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . enter 450 in the first field (width). such as JPEG. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. or any single-frame format. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. 8 Click Save. In this example.■ For Dimensions. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. BMP. click the Desktop icon. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. depending on the Frame Range. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. For Files of Type. or GIF.

Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

5 Select the roof. and click OK. click the Multi-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.Week Interval. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click OK. for Sun Position. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. USA. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. For Time Interval. for File name enter 2pm . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Los Angeles . select One week. On the Annotation Categories tab. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . and click Duplicate. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. clear Section Boxes.Boston. specify 2:00 pm. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and on the View Control Bar. 12 In the Name dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . MA. For Time. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 8 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.

15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Click the Desktop icon. 17 On the View Control Bar. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. such as East . you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. click OK. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. for File Name. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. you mirror all model elements. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. and annotations in non-drafting views. and click OK. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Floor Plans. for Compressor. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). Re-orienting the Project | 447 . and click Save. In the Length/Format dialog. model views. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway.South. When you mirror a project. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Mirroring the Project In this exercise.West or North . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.

6 On the Standard toolbar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. Then. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. right-click. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help.West axis. click OK. select East . For additional information. select the roof. under 3D Views. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 In the drawing area. 5 In the warning dialog. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. The project is mirrored along the East . and click OK. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog.West.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.

11 For Sun Position. For example. click the Still tab. select Summer Solstice. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 10 Under Date and Time. on the Still tab. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click . select Cast Shadows. click . Orienting to True North | 449 . 5 For Sun Position. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. click . you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. specify 11:00 AM for time. 8 For Sun Position. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 Under Date and Time. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Apply. and click OK. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. change the time back to 12:00 PM.

the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. and select Winter Solstice. double-click 01 Entry. 18 In the Project Browser. the view settings must be set for True North. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. and click OK. and click OK. 15 For Sun Position. for Orientation. right click 01 Entry. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. click OK. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. and click Properties. When a project is started. 14 On the View Control Bar. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. This process establishes the view setting to True North. click the Still tab. select True North. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. under Floor Plans.

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view. Orienting to True North | 451 . as shown.■ To establish the True North direction. ■ To establish the new direction of True North.

32 On the View Control Bar. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. and click Element Properties. select True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. click . for Orientation. 28 In the Project Browser. enter True North Orientation. under 3D Views. right-click. for Orientation. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click Apply. 27 In the Rename View dialog. select True North Orientation. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.23 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. click the Still tab. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. select Project North. right-click 01 Entry. and click Properties. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 33 For Sun Position. right-click 01 Entry. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

click Summer Solstice. Click Save. for Dimensions. click OK. for Compressor. Orienting to True North | 453 . enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. under Format. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For File Name. and click OK.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Desktop icon. and click OK. For Files of Type. enter 600 in the first field. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that AVI Files is selected. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. In the Length/Format dialog. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Los Angeles. click the Single-Day tab. Click OK. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.

For Sun. Rendered views do not have this limitation. and click OK. Since a rendered image is temporary. and 2:00 PM. 2 In the Project Browser. for Date and Time. and click Duplicate. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. select Interior: Sun only. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. select Winter Solstice. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. select Medium. select Edit/New. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. for Setting.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. capturing it. 1 In the Project Browser. Under Lighting. click Render. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Scheme. under Quality.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. 3 On the View Control Bar. In the Name dialog. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. select 12/22. and exporting it as a JPEG image. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. (Show Rendering Dialog). and click OK. In this exercise. under 3D Views. under Settings. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail.

and click OK. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. enter living area_winter solstice. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. For Files of type. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. click Desktop. click Save to Project. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. and click Save. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. click Export.6 In the Rendering dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 .

456 .

When organizing presentation graphics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. For the realistic approach. Co-house. In this tutorial. and section boxes. sections. linework. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. type. or the client. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. and details. however. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. length. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. They include rendering. elevations. 457 . advanced model graphics. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. Other tools in the software. a consultant. you explore the stylistic approach. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. In this series of exercises. Whether the audience is the general contractor. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. Using the pre-built building model. you can choose between realism and stylistics. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. an outside reviewer. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number.

and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a presentation floor plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a copy of the plan. To fit the floor plan into the analytique.

2 In the Project Browser. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and click Rename. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. click in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. exit the menu. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. right-click 2nd Flr. Cnst. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Cnst. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. under Floor Plans. and click OK. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr.

and clear DOWN Text. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. and click Save. expand the Stairs category.rvt. Down Arrow. elevations. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. dimensions. and other annotations in this view. No annotations display in the view. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. click the Annotation Categories tab. click the Scale control and select 1:100. UP Text. 7 Under Visibility. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 11 In the Save As directory. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 8 Click OK. and Up Arrow. this represents the view getting smaller. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. sections.

■ For Contrast. however. and click OK. the darker the shadows. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and select 1st Flr. you can create. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Sun Position. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. NOTE For this step. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. If you select a different city. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 9 For City. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. on the Still tab. 1:00 PM. modify. MA. The higher the number. select Boston. select Cast Shadows. click . Time and Place. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. Within a project. specify 35. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. you can select any city. 3 On the View Control Bar. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display.rvt. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. click . Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . for Date and Time. click the Place tab.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 7 For Place. double-click it in the Project Browser. specify 10/27. At that place. 12 Click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 6 Under Settings. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select By Date. Cnst. click (Shadows Off).

under Settings. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click OK. click (Shadows On). 19 Proceed with the next exercise. click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Sun Position. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. and click Advanced Model Graphics. clear Ground Plane at Level. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. .

right-click the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click to place it. click Add View. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click OK. The viewport displays at the cursor. click Sheet. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and notice the view title. and click Add View to Sheet. 6 On the Design Bar. select Arch Portrait. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented.

12 In the Name dialog. To accomplish this. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. click Edit/New. For this analytique. click . for Show Title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Duplicate. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. The viewport no longer displays a view title. and click Activate View. enter Presentation. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. select No. under Graphics. click OK.

22 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. click . The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 20 On the Options Bar. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. click Region Properties. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click Edit/New. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Invisible lines. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. click . TIP Use care when sketching this chain. and select Chain. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. When you finish drawing the chain. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. fill properties. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. and the boundary of the region. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. click Filled Region. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. If necessary.

click Duplicate. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click OK. for Fill Pattern. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. under Name. and click Deactivate View. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. for Sheet Name. and click View Properties. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Presentation. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. enter Solid Black. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Name dialog. and click OK.24 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll down. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. under Identity Data. click Finish Sketch. select Solid fill. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. and click OK. under Graphics. 30 On the Design Bar.

rvt. right-click South. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .

and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. exit the menu. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. scroll up.2 In the Project Browser. click in the Walls row. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. under Visibility. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 For Contrast. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Rename. right-click Copy of South. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 9 Click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. and click OK. click in the drawing area. select By Date. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 14 For Sun Position. specify 2:30 PM. 12 Under Shadow. 3 In the Rename View dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 16 In the Name dialog. and click OK. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. By changing the angle of the sun. on the Model Categories tab. Time and Place. select Cast Shadows. click Override. under Elevations. specify 35. and click OK. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Settings. clear Visible. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. expand the Doors category. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 18 For Time. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click OK. click . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. click Duplicate. click (Shadows Off). Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Pattern Overrides.

Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Views dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Presentation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.rvt.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. click Add View. double-click A105 .

470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The viewport displays a view title. The view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation.

8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. click Modify.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.

you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. and use the flip arrows if necessary. under Floor Plans. for Scale. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). click Section. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. double-click 1st Flr. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Add the section shown below. Cnst. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select 1: 100. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

To fit correctly in the analytique. click Callout. expand Sections (Callout 1). select 1 : 100. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 2. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 .Section 2 is added to the building model. as shown. this view needs to be rotated 180°. To accomplish this. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily.

10 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Rename. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Sections (Callout 1). 17 Under Visibility. 15 Under Visibility. click the Model Categories tab. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Pattern Overrides. clear Visible. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand the Doors category. right-click Callout of Section 2.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. enter Presentation Section 2. click Override. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). scroll up. click in the Walls row. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Presentation Section 2. click Modify. and clear Elevation Swing.

click The crop regions no longer display. 22 On the View Control Bar. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. (Hide Crop Region). This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. When you select the crop region. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 20 Click OK. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Presentation Section 2. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). click Duplicate. and click OK. The shadows do not offer much contrast. 6 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. 3 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. For Contrast. in the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. In the steps that follow. specify the following: Under Shadow. ■ For Sun Position. In addition. under Sections (Callout 1).rvt. specify 35. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click .

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. specify 70°. For Altitude. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Silhouette Edges. click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. click (Shadows On). Click OK. For Azimuth. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. specify 135°. was added to this training file for training purposes. NOTE The line style. select Directly. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. select Silhouette Edges. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. and click OK. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . Select Relative to View.

Presentation. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Section: Presentation Section 2. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Add View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the selected view. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. and click Add View to Sheet.

select Viewport : Presentation. The section needs to be rotated 180°. you click to specify the start radius. To rotate an object. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 6 On the Design Bar. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. under Sections (Callout 1). 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . double-click Section 2. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation.5 In the Type Selector. and press Enter. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. Using a clock as a reference. In the steps that follow. The view title no longer displays. click (Rotate). click Modify. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view.

The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. double-click A105 .The callout rotates 180°. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.Presentation. under Sheets (all). Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. and drag it up and to the left as shown. After applying the view template to a new section view. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 .

click OK. 4 In the View Templates dialog. and click OK. you can simply apply the presentation view template. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Presentation Section 2. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click Rename. 3 In the New View Template dialog. right-click Copy of Section 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Presentation. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Section 1. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK.

Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. for Rotation on Sheet. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 12 In the Views dialog. annotations. select 90° Counterclockwise. double-click A105 . select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click OK. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Right-click the viewport. and click Deactivate View. The furniture. and click Activate View. 18 Right-click the viewport. select Presentation. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. under Sheets (all). you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. under Graphics. and click Add View to Sheet. under Names. click Add View. and elevation swings no longer display. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. lighting fixtures.

traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . such as a tracery window or a column capital. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.

and click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. click Modify. double-click Section 1. After you add the callout. select the callout. 4 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Callout of Section 1. click Callout. under Sections (Callout 1).

clear Annotation Crop. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. clear Crop Region Visible. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.5 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select the crop region. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Presentation Callout. and click View Properties. enter Presentation Callout. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Extents. as shown. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. under Sections (Callout 1). 8 Right-click. and click OK.

For Scale Value 1. click Add View. specify 22. 14 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Viewport : Presentation. 15 On the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . Click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section: Presentation Callout. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 .Presentation. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Custom. and click Activate View.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 12 In the Views dialog.

hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. under Sections (Callout 1). 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. click Edit/New. and click Deactivate View. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. and move it to the position shown below. and make adjustments as necessary. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. When finished. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the steps that follow. click Filled Region. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 23 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. The composition set for the analytique is now complete.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. activate the viewport.

28 In the Project Browser. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. and click OK 3 times. When you are finished. click . double-click A105 . 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. and click Activate View. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Filled Region.Presentation. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. select Solid fill. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. click Finish Sketch. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . on the Design Bar. for Fill Pattern. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all).25 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Finish Sketch. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.31 On the Options Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar. 34 Select the crop region. click (Show Crop Region). 32 On the Design Bar. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and sketch the rectangle shown below. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. click .

36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . click (Hide Crop Region). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.35 On the View Control Bar. and click Deactivate View.

492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click (Shadows Off). and apply shadows to the views. click the Scale control. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click 1 : 200. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.rvt. 5 On the View Control Bar. double-click Isometric. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click Advanced Model Graphics.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise.

Cnst. For Azimuth. specify 135°. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Section Box. A section box displays around the building model. under 3D Views. specify 45°. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 12 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Isometric 2. For Contrast. right-click Isometric 1. and click Rename. and click Rename.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Duplicate. click . For Sun Position. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Isometric 1. select Silhouette Edges. select Directly. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. in the list. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 8 In the Name dialog. Click OK. Select Relative to View. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 2. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. specify 35. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . and click OK. under 3D Views. Select Ground Plane at Level. select Cast Shadows. 14 In the Project Browser. under Extents. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. for Silhouette style. For Altitude. Select 1st Flr. and click OK.

You can use this to rotate the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. as shown. click Modify on the Design Bar. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. Grips display on each face of the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. When you are finished. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .19 Select the section box.

Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. you can adjust the plane location. right-click Isometric 2. On the Annotation Categories tab. The section box no longer displays. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify on the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . 23 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. and click OK. 22 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the section box. under 3D Views. Next. make a copy of the view. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. double-click A105 . When you are finished. under 3D Views. and click Rename. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. 29 To hide the section box. 25 To hide the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. If desired. 31 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. 21 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab.Presentation. under Sheets (all). NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 3. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. enter Isometric 3.

The filled region partially covers the view. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Type Selector.

click Edit/New. click Region Properties. select Concrete. 39 For Background. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . 36 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Lines. for Fill Patterns.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Activate View. 41 On the Design Bar. click Edit. 40 Click OK twice. select Transparent. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. This will make it easier to draw lines. 42 Using the drawing tools. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. 35 Select the poche filled region. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. On the Options Bar.

click Finish Sketch. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Fill Pattern. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Solid fill.43 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 46 Click OK twice. click Region Properties. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 47 On the Design Bar.

click Camera. you create the final view for the analytique. under Floor Plans. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. a cutaway perspective view. The view opens immediately. Cnst. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . you add it to the presentation sheet.rvt.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. then you specify the eye direction and range. double-click 1st Flr. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

For Contrast. For Sun Position. select Silhouette Edges. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). and click Advanced Model Graphics. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. specify the following: Under Shadow. for Name. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. specify 35. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. for Silhouette style. and click OK. click . 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

under Extents. select Section Box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . and click OK. 12 Select the section box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Grips display on each plane of the section box. A section box now cuts through the building model.

15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under 3D Views. for Width. 19 To hide the section box. under Sheets (all). drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. you must specify the actual size of the image. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click (Hide Crop Region). select Scale (locked proportions). and click OK. 18 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. clear Section Boxes. enter 165 mm.14 Select the crop region. In the Type Selector. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. under Change.Presentation. double-click A105 . select Viewport : Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 21 In the Project Browser. 17 Under Model Crop Size. click Size.

and click OK. select a font. 23 Proceed with the next exercise.Presentation sheet is not the active view. and click OK. enter Description. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. click Text. select Text : Title. click Edit/New. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser. under Text. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Duplicate. specify a text size of 40 mm. click . Annotating the Analytique on page 503. enter Title. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog. specify a text size of 6 mm. click Duplicate. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. Annotating the Analytique | 503 .22 Click File menu ➤ Save. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. and click OK. 10 In the Name dialog. select the same font as the title. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.

504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Text : Description. 16 In the Type Selector. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

such as walls. curtain walls. you can easily add detail with Revit components. that compose the building. you create a small building from the front mass form. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. In this tutorial. After you import the SketchUp model. 507 . and roofs. Once the model has been imported. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements.

buildings. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . select Auto-Detect. for File name. For Import units. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. and not in the library. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. For Colors.rte. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. 6 In the Save As dialog. under Template file. 9 In the informational dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click the Massing tab. visible elements. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. For Files of type. 10 In the Name dialog.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. select All. and click Save. or select from a list. click OK. enter Import SketchUp. click Browse. and click OK. you create a Revit Architecture project. 2 In the New Project dialog. enter SketchUp Model. For Layers. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. Double-click the Common folder. click OK. click Create Mass. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. select SketchUp Files. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. right-click in the Design Bar. select Preserve. Click the Sketchup file. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. 4 In the New Project dialog. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon.skp.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . select Level 1. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. In a new project. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. Click Open. depending on the complexity of the project. For Place at level. 14 On the View toolbar. and roofs. such as walls.Center. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 In the warning dialog. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. curtain walls. ■ ■ For Positioning. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. select Manual . click . NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. click the Close button. click Finish Mass.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. Level 1 is the only choice.

Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. that compose the building. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. curtain walls. click Roof by Face. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. for Level. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. select the face so that it highlights in red. such as walls. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. After you create the building from the mass faces. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise.400mm displays. and roofs. and when the cursor displays a plus sign.18 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. verify Basic Roof: Generic . 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. and on the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. verify Level 2 is selected. 3 In the Type Selector.

6 On the Options Bar.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. on the View toolbar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click Create Roof. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. verify that Select Multiple is selected. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . 9 On the Options Bar. To see the new roof.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. A roof is created from the mass face. click to display masses. on the Options Bar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click Create Roof. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.

512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Create Roof. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

21 On the Design Bar. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 22 In the Type Selector.200mm displays. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . for Loc Line. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. select Core Face: Exterior. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. verify Basic Wall: Generic . and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Wall by Face. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.15 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. click roofs that you created.

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 28 In the Type Selector. 25 On the View toolbar. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. click to view only the walls and roofs. click Curtain System by Face. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar.

click Create System.30 On the Options Bar. 31 Using the same technique. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .

click Roof by Face. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. and on the Options Bar.35 On the Design Bar. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create System. click Curtain System. click Create Roof. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. and on the Options Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. click Wall by Face. and select it. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below.

specify a point to place the camera. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Camera. double-click Level 1. Below the right corner of the view. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 42 On the View toolbar. and select the mass face shown below. click to view the building that you have created. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents.

Click the frame to display its grips. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. to view only the walls. click your building in the view. The perspective view created by the camera displays. specify a point for the camera target. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 48 On the View toolbar. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. roofs. as shown. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips.

Click OK. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . 50 On the Options Bar. and select the left curtain system in the view. click Modify. select Center. select Center. for Justification. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. for Justification. Under Grid 1 Pattern. Under Grid 2 Pattern.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. click .

click Door. under 3D Views. 59 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. and move the roof edges as shown below. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 56 In the Project Browser. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the Type Selector. and click Cancel to end the command. 55 Right-click. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. double-click 3D View 1.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. For example. Like walls. you need to select a panel. you need to change the length of the wall. you create a curtain system using the wall command. or you can use a specific curtain system command. click Training Files. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model.rvt. 525 . they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Like windows. To switch panel types. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To change grids. grid lines. you select the grid.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. and you can change these elements individually. and mullions. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. This affects the entire curtain system. and they are not windows. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. to resize the system. Unlike windows. panel. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Flat Curtain System In this lesson.

Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. click Wall. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click Ground Floor. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor.1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.

10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Creating an Entrance | 527 .

You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Click OK. enter 1200. and click (Properties). The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. top constraint. using curtain grids. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. and room bounding. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. top and base attachments. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.11 Select the curtain system. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. For Top Offset.

double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. right-click Elevation 1 . 20 In the drawing area.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.a. click Curtain Grid. click Modify. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. and click OK. double-click GROUND FLOOR. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. click Elevation.

33 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. FIFTH FLOOR. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. FOURTH FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR.26 While pressing CTRL. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. Click to place another grid line. one larger than the other. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. and click OK. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Modify. Click to create a vertical grid. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. while pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. THIRD FLOOR.

35 Select the left vertical grid line. and on the Options Bar.Next. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Instead of using the Door command. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Creating an Entrance | 531 . The two segments are removed. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. The segment line style changes to dashed. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. click Add or Remove Segments. you add a doorway to the curtain system. and then select the segment above it. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor.

click Curtain Grid. 40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. and lock them. select One Segment. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 43 Delete the dimensions. click in any white space to exit the editor. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. Creating an Entrance | 533 . Use the following image as a guide. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions.

50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. and click Wireframe. 54 On the Design Bar. The panel changes to a double door. . you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 52 On the Type Selector. click view. Now.rfa. 55 In the Project Browser. This changes the graphics style of the Next. These panels schedule as doors. They are part of the curtain panel category. not as curtain panels. under Elevations. 56 In the Project Browser. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. click Training Files. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors.Next. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. click Modify. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. double-click Entrance Elevation. on the new curtain system you added. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 57 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 65 On the View Control Bar. click . 61 With the panel still selected. The glazed panels display in blue. 63 Click OK twice. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. and Material specifies the shading and patterning.60 On the Type Selector. click System Panel : Solid. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel.

select Entire Grid Line. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 4 On the Options Bar. click Save As. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Mullion.rvt.68 On the File menu. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

10 Delete the mullions below them. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary.6 On the Options Bar. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. because their width reduces the size of the doors. there are a few that you do not want. You are going to change some mullion joins. clickModify. so you remove them next. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. however. select All Empty Segments. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors.

The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 17 Save the file. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Modify. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels.Two mullion join controls display. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 16 In the Project Browser. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Finally. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 Click the top mullion control. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. you can also right-click. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 15 On the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 1 In the Project Browser. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 7 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Curved Curtain System | 539 . double-click GROUND FLOOR. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. Finally. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 4 In the Type Selector. click Wall. for Top Constraint. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. enter 1200. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. Click OK. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. (Arc passing through three points).Curved Curtain System In this lesson. For Top Offset. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed.

12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. eighths. you place grids on the system. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Divide the halves into quarters.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. double-click East. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. You are going to use one of these snaps points. Next. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. under Elevations. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then sixteenths. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 14 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid.

16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. to filter out all 19 Save the file. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Next. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.300mm. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. click Modify. select Basic Wall: Generic . select the bottom layer of panels. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. you change some panels in the system.

3 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 6 On the Options Bar. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 11 On the Design Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 9 Select the extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar.rft. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. . 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Lines.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Glass. 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click . and click . click Finish Sketch. under Elevations. click Lines. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. double-click Exterior. enter 100. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . clear Chain. 8 On the Design Bar.

click (Default 3D View). click 25 On the View toolbar. 24 On the View toolbar.rfa. and return to the project file.Pattern. click Modify. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . double-click FOURTH FLOOR. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. select Curtain Panel . under Floor Plans. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Change Walls Orientation. right-click. All fourth floor panels are selected. 21 In the Type Selector. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rfa family.14 On the Design Bar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 .Pattern.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 23 Right-click. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. (SteeringWheels).

This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. All fifth floor panels are selected. 29 In the Type Selector. 30 Save the file. under Floor Plans. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. select System Panel . 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. right-click. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. All the panels change to the solid panel.Solid. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 27 In the Project Browser.

9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). 8 On the Design Bar. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft. 1 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ For Sides. For vertical mullions. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. for Profile Usage.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. select Mullion. enter 8. under Elevations. click Training Files. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. double-click East. Select Radius. and click OK. and enter 50 mm for the radius. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Click again to specify the ending point. . click Lines. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. and select it. click Mullion.

it can be added as a mullion type. click Mullion. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. clear Coarse and Medium. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.detail. click Detail Component. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . and click OK. 20 Select the detail component. 13 On the Options Bar. After the new profile is loaded. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. double-click Southeast Isometric. and return to the project file. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .11 On the Design Bar. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. under 3D Views. click Modify. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. click Training Files. 27 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. click (SteeringWheels).rfa family. clear Fine. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 17 On the Design Bar. click Visibility. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. and click OK.rfa. and click Visibility. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 28 On the View toolbar. 31 Click .

44 Save the file. 33 Click Edit/New. 38 On the Options Bar. so you remove the unwanted ones. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Duplicate. right-click. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 37 Click OK twice. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. select All Empty Segments. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 41 In the Project Browser. for Profile. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 40 On the Design Bar. 36 Under Construction. You have placed more mullions than you want. 43 Press DELETE. select Circular Mullion for Family. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder.32 In the Element Properties dialog.

5 On the Options Bar. double-click TOP OF ROOF. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 4 On the Design Bar. and you can click to select them all. TIP To chain select all the walls. select Defines slope. and a ruled curtain system. All the inside faces highlight. a storefront system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. click Pick Walls. you learned to create a curved curtain system. make custom curtain panels and mullions. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. 1 In the Project Browser. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. and press TAB. In this lesson. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

under 3D Views. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar.7 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Roof Properties. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select Entire Grid Line. click Modify. 17 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. enter 600. 16 On the Design Bar. click Mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. Sloped Glazings | 549 . Click OK. click Finish Roof. 10 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 18 Save the file. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family.

Storefront System In this exercise. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 2400. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. click Wall. select Unconnected for Height. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click GROUND FLOOR. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall.

This specifies an exact length for the wall. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 8 Click the temporary dimension. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. Storefront System | 551 . 12 Select the storefront wall. 9 On the Design Bar. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. under 3D Views. click Edit/New. To see how the grid layout is defined. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. enter 10200 mm. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. and press ENTER. double-click Southeast Isometric. For this wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. and click . even if the wall height changes. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. which is specified in the type. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.

This completes the exercise on creating a storefront.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. or end. By setting the Angle value. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 1 In the Project Browser. center. and Offset. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. under 3D Views. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. enter 15. Justification. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 20 Save the file. double-click Southeast Isometric. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. see the Revit Architecture help. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Angle. you find Number. click Mullion. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. In this exercise. 18 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 16 Click OK. 19 Select a curtain grid. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout.

7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.3 On the View Control Bar. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 6 Click the highlighted line. and highlight the model line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid. 10 Select the panel. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . A panel between the 2 lines is created. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 9 On the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Next.8 Select the highlighted line. and click . click Modify. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system.

select System Panel : Solid. and define a ruled curtain system. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. Finally. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 16 In the Type Selector. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and then eighths. and then eighths. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. quarters.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. quarters. right-click. 18 Save the file.

556 .

you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this lesson. 557 . you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. click Training Files. including hip. gutters. In this exercise. In addition.rvt. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. and low sloped roofs.Roofs 15 In this lesson. you learn to create several different types of roofs. mansard. and open Metric\m_Roofs. and soffits to the roofs that you create. shed. In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn how to add fascia. gable.

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 5 In the Go To View dialog. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof.1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. click Ref Plane. and so on). verify Level 3 is selected for Level. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. expand Floor Plans. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 4 Click OK. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. select Name. click the blue square on the witness line. centerline. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and click OK.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

Next. select Chain. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. sketch the roof profile. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. click Lines. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

23 Select one of the breezeway walls. press CTRL. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click Modify. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. expand Sections (Type 1). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 21 In the Project Browser.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 17 On the Tools toolbar. expand Views (all). Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and double-click Section 1. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . and select the second wall. The roof should resemble the following illustration. press TAB. and then select the exterior face of the wall.

25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. click model. click Attach for Top/Base. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 26 On the View toolbar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.

2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. and double-click Garage Roof. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). and enter 600 for Overhang.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 3 In the Project Browser. sketch the roof footprint. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. verify that Defines slope is selected. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Next. click Pick Walls. m_Roofs. and click Yes.

(Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Defines slope. and click OK. select both slope definition lines. 13 On the Design Bar. By default. 11 Press CTRL. 14 When you see the informational dialog.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. 8 On the Options Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and on the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click (Properties). 15 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click Finish Roof. under Dimensions. Next. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. click the model. click Modify. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run.

3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang.rvt. click Pick Walls.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. m_Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. press TAB. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . clear Defines slope. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 3. When you complete the roof. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. expand Views (all). After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. expand Floor Plans.

select Defines Slope. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.6 Click to select all the walls. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 10 On the View menu. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. select Defines Slope. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 9 Using automatic snaps. sketch the chimney opening. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. Next. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). Next. 15 On the Options bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. add new slope lines to the roof. click Modify. click Lines.

click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. m_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . select Defines slope. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.18 On the View toolbar. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). and enter 600 for Overhang. and double-click Level 2.

close the roof sketch. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and click (Pick Lines). Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click Lines. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Next. using the following illustration for guidance.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. select the left vertical slope definition line. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 11 To trim the first line segment. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. click (Trim/Extend). clear Defines Slope. Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 9 On the Tools toolbar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.

enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 17 On the View toolbar. Next. 16 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 14 Under Constraints. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click (SteeringWheels). (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click Roof Properties.

570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . join the two remaining walls to the roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 23 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise.21 Click (SteeringWheels). Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.

You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 10 To trim the first line segment. Next. press TAB. expand Floor Plans. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. select the left vertical roof line.rvt. and enter 300 for Overhang.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click (Trim/Extend). 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. enter 0 for Overhang. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. clear Defines Slope. m_Roofs. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all).

click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click 20 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines slope. and press ENTER. m_Roofs.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. expand 3D Views. and click OK. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. click Modify. Next. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (SteeringWheels). 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. click Roof Properties. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you add a slope-defining line. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 16 Under Constraints. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 19 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.

you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. and enter 600 for Offset. 14 On the Options Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. and double-click Level 2. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. you need to add two reference planes. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . To help locate the position of each split. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 4 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. clear Defines Slope. Next. 3 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 9 On the Tools menu. Next. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click Slope Arrow. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 7 On the Options Bar. add two new slope arrows. click Ref Plane. 11 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Split Walls and Lines. Before you can add slope arrows. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click (Pick Lines). 5 On the View menu. click Modify. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. expand Floor Plans.

1 In the Project Browser. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. click Edit. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 20 Under Dimensions. select Slope for Specify. and click 19 Under Constraints.rvt. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 3 On the Options Bar. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model.15 to add the second slope arrow. the adjacent eave heights must align. When eave heights differ. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. 18 Press CTRL. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. expand Views (all). select both slope arrows. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. and then click OK. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. (Properties). m_Roofs. and move the cursor to place the arrow. enter 500 for Rise/1000.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. When you sketch a hip roof. expand Floor Plans. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. click Modify. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 16 Repeat steps 13 .

This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. and save the exercise file with a unique name. (Properties). select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 13 On the View toolbar. 14 If you want to save your changes. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 12 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. The eave lines display with a dimension. Next. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. on the File menu. select Defines Slope. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. on the Options Bar. under Dimensions. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click Save As. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. select a method to align the eaves. and click OK. click Align Eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. When aligning eaves. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). click Finish Roof.

and double-click North. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. on the Options Bar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.rvt. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. click Modify. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 Select the roof and. (Properties). expand Views (all). and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. under Constraints.

13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 7 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . click Modify. and click OK. press TAB. and double-click Level 3. under Dimensions. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. and then select Defines slope. expand Floor Plans. click Lines. Next. click (Pick Lines). and select the remaining three lines. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. expand Views (all).6 On the View toolbar.

you add a roof to a building shell. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. click Save As. click mansard roof. on the File menu. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes.rvt.17 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. After you add the roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. click Training Files. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. under Floor Plans. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 4 On the Options Bar. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the drawing area. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Design Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. double-click Roof.

click Roof Properties.Because the walls are not continuous. click (Trim/Extend). 11 On the Design Bar.EPDM.Insulation on Metal Deck . 7 On the Tools toolbar. for Type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Roof. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Steel Truss . 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. and click OK. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch.

under Floor Plans.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. In the next steps. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. double-click the section head to open the section view. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. click (Draw Split Lines). The roof has been created. and click to select it. 16 On the Options Bar.

18 Move the cursor down.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 20 Using the same method. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. move the cursor horizontally to the left.

The roof is now divided into 6 sections. In this exercise. exact placement of the points is not important. click (Modify Sub-Elements). Next. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. 23 On the Options Bar. You modify the points individually. on the Options Bar. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. (Add points). you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab.

584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . enter -2''. 25 Using the same method. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. click (Modify Sub-Elements). and press ENTER. for the dimension. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.

Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. for Elevation. including the interior edges of the roof regions. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . click (Properties). and on the Options Bar. enter 4''. and select all of the roof edges. and press ENTER. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the roof slab.27 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. 29 On the Design Bar.

35 Click OK 3 times. gutters. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. for Structure. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. By making the insulation layer variable. click Edit/New. under Construction. 37 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. gutters. 36 View the results in the section view. Creating Fascia. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and soffits in Revit Architecture. Creating Fascia. Gutters. you can easily create its fascia. you learn how to create roof fascia. After you create a roof. and Soffits In this lesson. Gutters. and Soffits on page 586. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. for the Thermal/Air Layer. and soffits. click Edit. The entire slab is sloped. on the File menu. select Variable. In some cases this type of slope is desired.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 3 Press CTRL. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and open Common\c_Condominium. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 .rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. enter Built-up Fascia. 8 In the Name dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.rfa. click Training Files. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 5 On the Options Bar. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and click OK twice. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. click (Properties).Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Construction.

click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 2 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters on page 588. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Properties). you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 13 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.

click Duplicate. and click OK. click in the Value field for Material. click Edit/New. Creating Gutters | 589 . select Metal-Aluminum for Name. . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.3 In the Properties dialog. and click OK three times. under Construction. 10 Click to place the gutter. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. Creating Soffits on page 590. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.

click Pick Roofs. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.rvt. and double-click Roof. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar.Creating Soffits In this exercise. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views.

8 Select the roof. click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. and then select the soffit to join them. expand 3D Views. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. Creating Soffits | 591 . 7 On the Tools menu.4 Select the roof. 6 In the Project Browser. click Join Geometry.

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As.

NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. select Square meters. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. under Length. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select Millimeters. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. In the final exercise. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. If you are using metric units. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. 3 Under Area.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units.rvt. click Project Units. select mm. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. 2 In the Project Units dialog. click Training Files. your values will be different. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. and open Common\c_Area. 593 . Click OK. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. For Unit Suffix. Finally.

TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 9 Click Cancel. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . or 0. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. These schemes define spatial relationships. Click OK. expand Floor Plans. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. click Settings. right-click in the Design Bar. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click OK. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click the Area Schemes tab. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. select m2. For Unit Suffix. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. it is not necessary in this exercise. expand Views (all).■ ■ ■ For Rounding. select 2 decimal places. the system-computed height defaults to the level. and click Room and Area. click the Room Calculations tab. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. To modify the area.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 13 In the Project Browser. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. click Area Plan. forming a closed loop. under Views (all). Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. you must manually add these boundary lines. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Click OK. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you must select one of the reference lines. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. 12 When the informational dialog displays. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. rather than the area tag. click Area. If you select No. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. When you select Yes in this dialog.

22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. and store area. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. you can either draw them or pick them. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. common areas. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . If you do not select this option. click Area Plan. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Next. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click Area Boundary. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. When you pick the walls. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Click OK. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). 21 On the Options Bar. When you add area boundary lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type.

Select Office area for Area Type. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 25 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ . and click to select the area. click Area.23 On the Design Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. click Modify. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 27 On the Options Bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 .

do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 33 In the Element Properties dialog.■ Click OK. click Modify and select the area. Click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. click ■ ■ ■ . add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 29 On the Design Bar. click Area. Select Office area for Area Type. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 32 On the Options Bar.

enter Core for Name.■ Click OK. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Store Area for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type.

the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 37 On the File menu. and click to place the legend. click Color Scheme Legend.Notice that within the two store areas.rvt. and click Save. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . In the next exercise. name the project Area-in progress. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Save. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. In this exercise.

Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Areas (Rentable). click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab.3 When the dialog displays. 7 Under Available fields. select Area Type and click Add. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 8 Add the fields Area and Name. under Category.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

Using Massing Tools In this lesson. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. and perimeter information. After you make building elements. and roofs. floors.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. floor. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. curtain systems. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. volume. you then need to update the building face. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. and floors. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. or both. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. You assign the default wall. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. 603 . Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. If you modify a massing face. In this tutorial. you can specify the view to display massing elements. building elements. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. roofs. After creating mass floors. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. At any time.

under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. and cutting geometry. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. under Views (all). Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click Create Mass.rvt. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click Massing. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. sweeps. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. click Training Files. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing .

enter 25000. click Lines. click the value for Material. and click . This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. (Line). select Mass (Opaque). click Extrusion Properties. for Extrusion End. enter 1550 mm. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Offset. click Finish Sketch. (Pick Lines). and click OK. under Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. for Name. 10 In the Materials dialog. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and click OK. 15 On the View Control Bar. click 18 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans.

30 In the drawing area. click Finish Sketch. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. for Extrusion End. for Name. under Views (all). under Materials and Finishes. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. TIP If necessary. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. under Views (all). The second form is on top of the first form. highlight the larger form. 26 In the Project Browser. click the value for Material. and click OK. click Extrusion Properties. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click . and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent). select Pick a plane. press TAB to highlight the entire face. double-click {3D} to see the results. and click OK. enter 25000. 23 In the Materials dialog. for Extrusion Start.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. under Constraints. 28 On the Design Bar. double-click West. enter 27500.

and clear Chain. 34 On the Options Bar. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click Lines. 37 On the Options Bar. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and on the Options Bar. click (Draw). 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. and click to select the line start point. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Next. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . (Pick Lines). click (Arc passing through three points).31 Click to select the face.

41 On the Edit toolbar. under Views (all). 45 In the Project Browser. double-click East. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 46 On the Design Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . (Line). 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click Edit Top. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. click (Move). on the Options Bar. and delete the vertical construction line. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Design Bar.TIP If you do not see this option. click Lines and.

for Material. 52 On the Design Bar.48 On the Options Bar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. click (Default 3D View). click 49 Create an arc as shown. click Finish Sketch. 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 54 Proceed to the next exercise. (Arc passing through three points). click Blend Properties. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. In the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. In this exercise. and click OK. 53 On the View toolbar. and that -92000 is specified for Second End.

as shown. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Line). you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 4 On the Options bar. click Ref Plane. m_Massing_Start. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. select the mass. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 7 Using the same technique. under Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane.rvt. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click Lines. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. and select Chain. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 2 In the drawing area.

enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 13 On the Design Bar. on the View Control Bar. snap the corners to the intersections. 16 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 17 On the View toolbar. When sketching each extrusion. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Extrusion Properties. In this exercise. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. enter 0. 15 Click OK. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. Using Swept Blends | 611 . you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 14 Under Constraints. for Extrusion End.

under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend.rvt. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. m_Massing_Start. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. click Sketch 2D Path. and click Lines. select a point below the mass elements. double-click Level 1. ■ For the radius.

The only way to align these elements is visually.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. click Finish Path. click (Rectangle). click Profile 1. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. click Lines. click (Default 3D View). From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. as shown. Using Swept Blends | 613 . and click Edit. 10 On the Design Bar.

as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. click (Align). click Profile 2. 15 On the Design Bar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click Finish Profile. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. and press ESC.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass.13 On the Tools toolbar. 17 Using the same method. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge.

under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Profile.18 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click OK twice. click <By Category>. 21 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Transparent). Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. Using Swept Blends | 615 . click Finish Swept Blend. and click . 23 On the Design Bar.

rvt. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Finally. you create new family types from a mass family file. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.24 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. click Finish Mass. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete.

for Depth. In this exercise. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. for Depth. enter 15000mm. and for Name. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 12000 mm. and for Name. and click Apply. enter 6000 mm. 7 Click New. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . and click Apply. enter 9000 mm. enter 18000 mm. and click OK. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for Height. under Other. 2 In the Family Types dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 11000 mm. for Height. 6 For Width. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. enter 68000 mm. enter 18000 mm. 5 Click New. enter 46000mm. and click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click New.rfa. 9 Click OK.rfa. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. for Depth. and click Apply.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Height. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and click OK. 8 For Width. for Width. click Training Files.

9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 2 In the Project Browser.rfa family files. on the View toolbar. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. click Place Mass. under Floor Plans.rfa. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Arc Dome. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. Semi Barrel Vault.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. You also load other existing mass families and place them. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 8 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. as shown. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. 1 If not already selected. 6 Open the Box-Training. click Training Files. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. and Triangle.

and on the Options Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. specify Mass (Transparent). click Place Mass. click Modify. 17 Press CTRL. for the Material parameter. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. 21 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the Type Selector. select the triangle. as shown. 24 On the Design Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 25 In the drawing area. click Modify. enter 90 for Angle. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to place the mass. specify Mass (Opaque). select the 3 boxes. click Place Mass. click (Element Properties). 14 In the Type Selector. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . and click OK twice.10 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 11 Select the box. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500.

26 Select the triangle. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 33 On the View toolbar. and click OK twice. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . specify Mass (Opaque). and click OK twice. click (Default 3D View). for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. specify Mass (Transparent). 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter.

NOTE When you join geometry. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. (Join Geometry).rvt file. click (Default 3D View). you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. you join these mass elements. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. In this exercise. In the next exercise.

under Floor Plans. on the Edit toolbar. 4 Select the triangle. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. double-click Site. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all).3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. click (Mirror). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser.

Joining Mass Elements | 623 . 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. click (Draw). 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. and then select the triangle. (Join Geometry).8 On the Options Bar. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). click 14 On the Tools toolbar. as shown. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 17 Press ESC to see the result. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. for Axis. enter SM.

do not clear the check mark. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. click (Add to Design Option Set).rvt. you joined mass elements together. (If Design Options is already selected. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 2 On the Window menu. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 1 On the Design Bar. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click Modify. and select the triangle mass element.In this exercise. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.

Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 2 semi barrel vaults.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. enter 90. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 13 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. select Rotate after placement. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. double-click Site. 14 In the drawing area. click Modify. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. under Views (all). 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. and click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Transparent). click Place Mass. for Angle. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. 5 In the Project Browser. clear Curved. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 7 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. select Sloped (primary). for the Material parameter.

under Elevations. under Views (all). 22 In the Project Browser. select the three arc domes. select Curved. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. for the Material parameter. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. TIP To find the correct shapes. and click (Element Properties). under Views (all). 23 On the View Control Bar. click (Add to Design Option Set). 28 In the Project Browser. specify Mass (Transparent). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. While pressing CTRL. and click OK twice. 20 In the drawing area. double-click North. and watch the status bar. clear Sloped.

33 In the Design Options dialog. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 34 Close the warning that displays. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. and click Close. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. you can make it the primary option. select Curved and. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. under Option. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise. 31 Click the value for Design Option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.rvt. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click (Design Options). select Curved from the Design Option menu.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . click the Design Options tab. 35 On the File menu. you placed mass elements into Design Options. click Make Primary. and click OK.

double-click {3D}. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rvt. under Views (all). 5 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. click (Pick Faces). 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click Wall by Face. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. select Basic Wall: Exterior .Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. click Training Files. and for Loc Line. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. select Wall Centerline.Brick on CMU. you pick massing faces to create walls. 2 On the View toolbar.

under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 5. 12 On the Design Bar.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . click Wall by Face. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. 9 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Views (all). double-click Level 3. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. under Views (all). You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. If desired. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 21 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 9. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results.

In this exercise. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . 4 Click OK. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Mass Floors. under Views (all). you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 8 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and exterior surface area. volume. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. When you select levels.rvt. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. clear Curtain Panels. and Walls. 6 On the Options Bar. Curtain Systems. and click OK. click Modify. 3 On the Model Categories tab. select all levels. perimeter. double-click {3D}. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 13 On the Design Bar.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click Mass Floors. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Modify. and click OK. 10 Press CTRL. 11 On the Options Bar. select Levels 1-4.

and click OK. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Level 1. 15 Press CTRL. click Mass Floors. 16 On the Options Bar. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 .14 On the Options Bar. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step).

press and hold SHIFT. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. select Mass Floor. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). 2 In the New Schedule dialog. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. under Available fields. and select Level. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. under Category. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add.In this exercise. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Floor Volume. 4 Using the same method. The Floor Area. schedules can be created using the mass floors. select Floor Area. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. and click OK. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Floor Perimeter.

and click OK. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. for Usage. enter Retail. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. for Sort by. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. select Mass: Family and Type. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. and click Remove. 13 With Usage selected. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Edit. expand Schedules/Quantities. After you assign usage. under Scheduled fields (in order). select Mass: Family and Type. for Fields. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 14 Select Level. under Other.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing.

and click Properties. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Floor Area. for Filter by. under Fields. in the field under Filter by. for Filter. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. for Then by. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. and select Grand totals. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 16 On the Formatting tab. click Edit. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. for Filter. click Edit. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. 19 Click OK twice. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Level. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. for Field formatting. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. and click OK. and click Rename. select Usage. under Other. elevation. select Usage. and plan views. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Other. 18 On the Filter tab. for Sort by. 27 Click OK twice. and in the field below. select Calculate totals. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 24 In the Project Browser. enter Hotel.

Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create roofs. by level. double-click {3D}. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. the floor area. 1 In the Project Browser. The mass floor schedules list. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model.rvt. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing .In this exercise. under Views (all). Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. you created mass floor schedules. click Roof by Face. floor perimeter.

click Create Roof.400mm. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.4 In the Type Selector. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. select Basic Roof : Generic .

select Curtain Panels. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. Curtain Systems. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. In this exercise. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. 13 Using the same method. and click OK. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.8 Using the method you just learned. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. and Walls. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 12 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing. in the Type Selector. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof.

4 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 Press CTRL. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . click Curtain System by Face. click Create System. under Views (all). 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 1 In the Project Browser.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.7 Using the same method. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .

click Create System. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 11 Using the same method. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass).9 On the Options Bar.

644 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise.rvt. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. you change the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise.12 Click Modify to exit the command.

3 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics.1 In the Project Browser. Next. click Modify. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). clear Exclude Design Options. and click (Element Properties). and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar. Curtain Systems. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. for Width. Floors. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Roofs. double-click Site. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . enter 30000. and Walls. 6 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View menu. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. clear Curtain Panels. and then click OK.

you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 12 On the View Control Bar. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. under Views (all).

click (Default 3D View). 17 Select the roof as shown.TIP To select the curtain wall. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click OK. you want to select the smaller one. click Remake. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Also. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar.

19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. and click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .

20 In the Project Browser. 1 Open the 3D view. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.rvt. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.

Massing only. and click OK. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 6 On the Model Categories tab.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. under 3D Views. 4 Rename the view 3D . 8 Click None to clear the selection. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 Select Mass. click All to select all categories. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.

You might create the model shown. This concludes the massing tutorial. to the building shell. such as columns and an extruded roof. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 .In this exercise. If desired. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components.

652 .

you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. In this tutorial. and typical office layouts. After you create a model group. You can also nest groups within other groups. you also simplify the modification process. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. hotel rooms. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. In this exercise. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and modify repetitive units. By grouping objects. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Creating. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. 653 . You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. the host group is also updated automatically. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. For example. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. or with those working on a different project. you not only simplify their placement. You mirror one instance of the group. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Modifying. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. In another exercise. all instances in the building model are updated. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. When you make changes to a nested group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. place. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create.

and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. click Training Files. 2 Click in the drawing area. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. expand Floor Plans.rvt. enter ZR. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. and double-click First Floor.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . expand Views (all).

click (Group). and click OK.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . 4 On the Edit toolbar. enter Typical Kitchen.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.

under Groups. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Kitchen. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. click Modify.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 On the Options Bar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.14 On the Edit toolbar. clear Copy. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

and on the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and one rotated. as shown. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.

Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. When you finish editing. Modifying a Group | 661 . you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. press TAB to highlight the wall. click Save As. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. and click to select it.

and click member to group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.3 Click (Group Member. press TAB. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). select the element. and click to select the wall. press TAB. and click to select the door. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping .). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Click (Group Member.). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. click Modify. NOTE To display an excluded element. 4 Move the cursor over the door.

Modifying a Group | 663 . click Door. 13 On the Design Bar. click Wall. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. clear Tag on Placement. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 14 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify.127mm. select Basic Wall : Generic . 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. move the cursor to the left.

and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 23 In the drawing area. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 21 On the Options Bar. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. In edit group mode.17 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor up. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Edit Group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

created in an earlier lesson. 26 Select the opening. you add the Typical Kitchen group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. for Unconnected Height. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. (Element Properties). click Modify. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. enter 2134. under Constraints. click Finish. and click OK. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. enter 1000. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 29 On the group editor toolbar. click 28 For Base Offset. Nesting Groups | 665 . which acts as the host. and the wall and folding doors for the closet.25 On the Design Bar.

click Edit Group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. select the Typical Kitchen group. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . double-click First Floor. in the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans. click (Add to Group).Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. 5 In the drawing area. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.

click Finish. and each of the bifold doors. select the wall between the folding doors. under Floor Plans. Nesting Groups | 667 .6 Press TAB. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. double-click Second Floor. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 7 On the group editor toolbar.

you add door tags to a group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. In the next exercise.rvt. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and filled regions. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. such as text. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. under Floor Plans. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. double-click First Floor. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. such as door and window tags. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects.

and select a point below the left elevator. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region. click to draw a rectangular region. 7 On the Design Bar.

11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and click OK. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. as shown. click (Group). 16 In the drawing area. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click Text.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to add an arc leader. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 12 Enter Tile. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. and on the Design Bar. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and select the text note and the filled region. 9 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise.18 On the Design Bar. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Because the detail group contains variables. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Create Instance. under Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. double-click Second Floor. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. expand Detail. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. under Groups.

double-click First Floor. click Tag ➤ By Category. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.manner that a drawing component can be added. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Modify.rvt. clear Leader. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 5 On the Design Bar.

expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). 9 On the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Filter dialog. click (Group). Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . select Door Tags.7 On the Options Bar. double-click Second Floor. click Check None. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. for Attached Detail Group Name. 11 In the Project Browser.

therefore. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. you can then work with it in the context of the new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. click Place Detail. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. When you load the group from the library into a new project. click Modify. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. and click OK. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 14 On the Options Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential.

12 On the Design Bar. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). click OK. verify that Project is selected. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . verify that Same as group name is selected. In this case. accept the default template file. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. for Create new. and expand Model. and click Save. and click OK. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. browse to the Desktop. under Groups\Model. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Modify. 3 For File name.rvt. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click Create Instance. 5 In the New Project dialog. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. select 2 Bedroom Unit. A warning dialog displays. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project.rvt.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Open. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. click Desktop. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. expand Groups. and click Save Group.

click Remove Link. click Bind.rvt file is added as a link to the project. expand Revit Links. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. and on the Options Bar. When a group is converted to a link. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 23 In the confirmation dialog. select the linked Revit model. click Link. click OK. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. and the link is removed. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 24 In the message dialog. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. click Use Existing. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Modify. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. and click OK. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Training Files. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule.Site 19 In this tutorial. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. You add property lines manually. you add a building pad to the site. and walkways. and then modify the data. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. convert the data to a table. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. In the final exercises. islands. 677 .

The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. expand Views (all). and double-click Site. Using the first method. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Site. 4 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you create a toposurface using two different methods. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. right-click in the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_First_Project. This project file was created using the default metric template. click Point. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Toposurface. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.

A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Use the following illustration as a reference. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Creating a Toposurface | 679 .5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.

enter 1500mm. click Finish Surface. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 12 On the Settings menu. 12000mm. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 15000mm. under Increment.8 On the Options Bar. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . under Additional Contours. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Site Settings. and 18000mm absolute elevations.

click to delete it. and press ENTER. click (Default 3D View). 19 On the Design Bar. on the Standard toolbar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. 15 On the View Control Bar. (SteeringWheels). click to view it at various angles. 14 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. and double-click South.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. modify the level names and elevations. 18 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . enter 1000mm. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click the elevation value. Before importing the contour data.

22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 24 In the Project Browser. select Preserve. click Yes. click Modify. under Floor Plans. rename the level Base Site Elevation. under Views (all). This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved.21 Click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER. 28 On the Design Bar. rename the level Basement. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. it is considered an import symbol. Until it is exploded. For Colors. 30 On the Edit menu. click Pin Position. double-click Site. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . Verify that Current view only is not selected. click Training Files. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 29 Select the imported topography. For Layers. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. select Specify. Click Open. 23 Click the Level 1 text. and click OK. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and press ENTER.

select it. click Visibility/Graphics. 32 On the View menu. click Modify. and click OK. 34 Under Visibility. When you select the import symbol. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. click the Annotation Categories tab. 36 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear C_INDX.31 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. clear Elevations. when the edges highlight. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog.

684 | Chapter 19 Site . name the project Site-in progress. click (SteeringWheels). 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 40 On the View toolbar.rvt. 42 On the View toolbar. 39 On the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. Using the first method.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. Using the second method. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Property Lines on page 684. and click Save. click Finish Surface. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. click (Default 3D View). you add property lines using two methods. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

select Create property lines by sketching. click Property Line. Click Modify. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click Lines. click Lines.rvt. double-click Site. 4 On the Design Bar. Site-in progress. On the Design Bar. Select and delete the right vertical line. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. do so before continuing. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Adding Property Lines | 685 . sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

9 In the warning dialog. and click OK. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click Finish Sketch. click OK. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click Property Line. click 12 On the Design Bar. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. to delete them. on the Standard toolbar. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. 6 On the Design Bar. when they highlight. add an arc line on the right. A warning dialog is displayed. select Edit Table. select the lines.

19 In the Tags dialog. 16 Click OK. click to place the property lines. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 15 Starting in Row #1. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.14 In the Property Lines dialog. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. If the gap is not closed. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. In the final step. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. you created two sets of property lines. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. click Tag ➤ By Category. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. Before adding property line segment tags. 23 On the View menu. this project file is required in its current state. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click Visibility/Graphics. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.rfa. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. clear Leader. 25 Under Visibility. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 30 On the View Control Bar.20 Click Load. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. click the Imported Categories tab. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. In this exercise. click Training Files. The tags display more prominently in this view. and click Drafting. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 27 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. and click OK.dwg and click OK. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . click to place it. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 22 In the Tags dialog.

7 Click OK. click Object Styles.rvt. select Topography. enter 1000. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. In the Object Styles dialog. select a shade of Brown. click Site Settings. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . Under Subcategory. click New. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Site-in progress. enter the name Working Contour. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 10 Under Additional Contours. under Contour Line Display. and click OK. Under Line Pattern. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.0mm. for Subcategory. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. Under Range Type. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. select Single Value. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. select Working Contour. Under Line Color. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 2 On the Settings menu. select Dash dot.

12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. In the next exercise. parking areas. Working Contour. The next exercise requires a new training file. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. In this exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. you create topographic subregions to define roads. such as material. and islands. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. you create subregions in order to define roads. The object style subcategory. and islands. parking areas.11 Click OK. Click Yes when prompted to save changes.

click Lines. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. 2 On the Design Bar. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Subregion. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. try to replicate the location and proportion. Although the exact dimensions are not important. and open Metric\m_Site. click Training Files. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 .

click Finish Sketch. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. enter Parking for Name.Tarmacadam for Name. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE In the Metric training file. select Site . Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 8 On the Design Bar. and click to open the Materials dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 6 In the Materials dialog. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. and click OK. click Properties. and click OK. click the value for Material. under Materials and Finishes.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser.9 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. As you create new subregions. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Tarmacadam. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. 14 On the Options Bar. and double-click Topography Schedule. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. click Edit Boundary. they display within this schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities.

you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 18 In the Project Browser. Notice that the project area has increased. double-click Topography Schedule. under Floor Plans. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Delete overlapping lines. 22 On the Design Bar. click Lines. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. click Subregion. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Within each subregion. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 16 On the Design Bar. In this training project.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 20 On the View Control Bar.

under Materials and Finishes. under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.Grass for Name. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. under Identity Data. 26 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. double-click Topography Schedule. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. and click to open the Materials dialog. and click OK.23 In the upper-right parking area. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 29 On the View Control Bar. enter Island . Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 .Grass for Name. click Properties. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. select Site . 30 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar.

and apply the material Site . Name each region Island Grass. double-click Site. click Lines. double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. double-click Topography Schedule. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . You must sketch each region separately. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.31 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Design Bar. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . 34 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Floor Plans.walkway. under Floor Plans. click Subregion.Grass. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 32 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Name the subregion Walkway.

there is still only one toposurface. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. double-click Topography Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. Notice that the schedule has been updated. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. click Finish Sketch. 37 On the Design Bar.

you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. and click Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. When you use the grading tool. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 2 Select the toposurface. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. under Floor Plans. this project file is required in its current state. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.rvt. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.

8 Select the topographic surface. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. under Phasing. click (Element Properties). A warning dialog is displayed. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Using Phasing on page 761. click Graded Region. Notice that the toposurface displays differently.3 On the Options Bar. select Existing for Phase Created. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. and click Select and Edit. see the tutorial. select Copy Internal Points.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site . The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 10 Press DELETE.

12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. and new. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. demolished. Grading the Toposurface | 701 .

19 On the View Control Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Point. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. click Finish Surface. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.13 Press DELETE. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . click (Default 3D View). 17 On the Design Bar.

under Phasing. specify Existing for Phase. you create a building pad. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 24 On the View menu. When you add a building pad. specify New Construction for Phase. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. click to view it at various angles. this project file is required in its current state. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . Only the graded topography displays. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. (SteeringWheels). and delete it. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. and click OK. only the original toposurface displays. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click View Properties. under Phasing. and click OK. 23 Select the toposurface. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display.20 On the View toolbar. you can delete it. Therefore. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. click View Properties. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu.

the Pick Walls command is active. click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. NOTE By default. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. click Pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. If you have an existing building model.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar.

click (SteeringWheels). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 9 On the View toolbar. 8 On the View toolbar. 7 On the View Control Bar. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. this project file is required in its current state. Adding Site Components on page 706. click (Default 3D View). Notice the new building pad.

click Parking Component. double-click Site. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. and select the parking space. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . 3 In the Type Selector.rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . under Floor Plans.Adding Site Components In this exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.90 deg. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.

Adding Site Components | 707 . TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. click (Default 3D View). 8 On the View toolbar.

708 | Chapter 19 Site . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Site Component. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. double-click Site.9 On the View toolbar. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. choose any tree type. Notice the new parking spaces. under Floor Plans. 12 In the Type Selector. click (SteeringWheels).

Adding Site Components | 709 . 15 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the following illustration. 14 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click (Default 3D View). the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

double-click Site. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Apply. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. this project file is required in its current state. and click OK. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 5 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. Site tutorial-in progress. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. and click Apply.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Hidden Line. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed.

to position the shoulder of the leader. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 8 On the Options Bar. outside of the site. Click again to the left to position the leader. as shown: 10 Using the same method. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Click up and to the left. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. In the following exercise.

11 On the Design Bar. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 12 Press and hold CTRL.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. click Modify.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder.■ Clear Leader. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . click Modify. this project file is required in its current state. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.

12 In the Site plan. click Schedule/Quantities. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 8 Under Fields. select Mark. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and under Heading. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 5 Under Available fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Views (all). If necessary. under Space. The parking schedule is displayed. and under Heading. enter Size. click the Fields tab. Site tutorial-in progress. 9 On the Window menu. click Tile. 7 Under Fields. double-click Site. and click Add. and click OK. select Parking for Category.rvt. select Type. select Type. number the first three spaces consecutively. enter Space. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . and click OK. 13 In the Parking Schedule. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 On the Window menu. select Mark. click Close Hidden Windows. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 4 Under Available fields. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Add.

Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . finish numbering the remaining spaces. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.

716 .

The first time you activate worksets within a project. select the desired workset. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . This prevents possible conflicts within the project. In this tutorial. go to the Worksets dialog. Working in a shared project In a shared project. When you are working on a shared project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Using Worksharing. such as annotations and dimensions. and so on. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. however. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. All other team members can view this workset. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. they cannot make changes to it. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. A workset is a collection of building elements. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. called Worksharing. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Elements specific to a view. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. you can select which worksets are open or closed. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. After the project is shared. and click Editable. such as walls. stairs. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. floors. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. To make a workset editable. you must first enable Worksharing. use Element Borrowing. doors. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you specify an active workset.

If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. In the next exercise. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. not including the Project Standards. Shared Levels and Grids. After learning the fundamentals. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Instead. When setting up Worksharing. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. In most projects. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You should have at least one workset for each person. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. such as a tenant interior. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Experience has shown that. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member.dialog. for a typical project. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. and View worksets. In a multi-story structure. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .

you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view.Team member roles Typically. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. When you create a new workset. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. if a workset named Interior was created. with each assigned a specific functional task. For example. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. As new members create worksets for their own use. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. On this tab. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Regardless of the default setting. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. each team member has control over a portion of the design. designers work in teams. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared.

720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. When you save to the central file. After saving to the central file. Generally. When finished or at regular intervals. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. you can select which workset is active. proceeds as usual. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. however. On the Options Bar. However. This makes them available to other team members. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. This is called “Selective Open.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Therefore. you make that workset editable by you. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. As you work. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. the file is saved as the central file. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When you save locally (to your local file). within the local file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. your changes are saved. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. your changes propagate to the entire team. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. When you save to the central file. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you should then save to your local file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available.

change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you work no differently then you would in the office. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. if you know who checked out the required workset. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. In this conceptual exercise. for instance. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. reload the latest changes from the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. and then save the local file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. When working remotely. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. make any required worksets editable. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . Alternatively. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. In the next exercise. In this situation. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. save to the central file. using VPN. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. To do this. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. In this instance. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. and make that workset editable.

under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. and notice all are editable by you. click Training Files. click Worksets." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. 3 In the Worksets dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. When you enable worksharing. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Your username displays as the present owner. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. you enable Worksharing within an existing project.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. The Worksets dialog displays.

Project Standards. In this training file. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. and double-click Level 1. 16 In the drawing area. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. it is better to make them visible by default. under Identity Data. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". another is assigned the interior layout.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. When you initially activate Worksharing. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . currently named Workset1. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. 8 Click OK. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. select Workset1. click . select any of the exterior walls of the building model. a small number of team members are working on the building model. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. Therefore. click OK. 14 In the Worksets dialog. click New. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. For training purposes. 9 Click New. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. clear Families. In this case. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. however. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. For example. Only User-Created worksets should display. 17 On the Options Bar. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. expand Floor Plans. 12 Click Rename. expand Views (all). Because the interior walls appear in many views. You do. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. In this simple training project. clear Visible by default in all views. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 11 In the Worksets dialog. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. imagine four users including yourself. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. and Views. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 13 In the Rename dialog. ■ 5 Under Show. and click OK. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. you can rename the default workset. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. type the name Exterior Shell. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and click OK. under Identity Data. click . The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. stairs.19 Click OK. 26 On the View menu. and walls. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. select Interior Layout for Workset. click . and click OK. under Identity Data. 23 Select all of the interior elements. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 24 On the Options Bar. click the Worksets tab. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 20 Select one of the interior walls. including the interior doors. select Interior Layout for Workset.

41 In the Worksets dialog. 42 On the right side of the dialog. under Identity Data. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 33 In the Project Browser. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. If any interior elements remain. click Close. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Click Save. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. and click OK. 44 On the File menu. select all of the interior elements of the building model. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click . click the Worksets tab. click Worksets. click Save As. 30 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. In this exercise. 32 Select Interior Layout. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . Now that you have created the central file. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click Non Editable. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. under Views (all). Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. 38 In the Save As dialog. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 35 On the Options Bar. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 34 In the drawing area. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. select Interior Layout for Workset.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 43 Click OK. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you enabled Worksharing on a project. and click OK.

Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. select all the User-Created worksets. click Save As. 6 On the File menu. click Open. In addition. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. please do so before continuing. 7 In the Save As dialog. 4 Click Open. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. and click OK. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and select Yes for Editable. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 15 In the Project Browser. select the central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 12 Click OK. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . make modifications to the building model. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. If you have not yet completed the exercise. select Interior Layout for Name. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. select Interior Layout. Next. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. and click Save. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. expand Floor Plans. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. In this case. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. Before working on the model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. click Worksets. expand Views (all). 13 On the Window menu. click Options. check out worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. 2 In the Open dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and select Specify. and click OK. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you create your local file.

however. click . 22 Click OK. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 23 On the File menu. click . 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Worksets. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. In this case. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. under Identity Data. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. If it was owned by another user. 24 Click OK. you can still edit this wall. 20 Under Constraints. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. and click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. Because this element is not owned by another user. In the Worksets dialog. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. On the Options Bar. notice the Editable Only option. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Verify that it is cleared. If this is selected. click Modify. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset.

728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 26 Delete the door. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Wall. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Door. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 31 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The precise location is not important.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Modify. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 29 In the Type Selector.126mm Partition (2-hr). 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 34 In the Type Selector.

notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. which matches the information in the Status Bar. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. For training purposes. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. If you have not yet completed these exercises. In addition. add two door openings into the rooms you created. and save locally immediately afterward. checked out worksets. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. you should perform regular saves. click Save to Central. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. save to central. In this particular case. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. it is recommended. Throughout the process. please do so before continuing. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. each user must check out worksets. you should relinquish all worksets. When working in your local file. Borrowed Elements is selected. leave this file open in its current state. By default. In this exercise. You modified the building model. and reload the latest changes. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. displays the workset as well as the element type. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . you created your local file. Whenever you save. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. two users access the central file through a network connection.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. make elements editable. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. a tooltip. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. At the end of a work session.

In the following section of this exercise. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2.rvt. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. User 2: Create a local file. select all the User-Created worksets.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. instructions are staggered. return to the Settings dialog. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . In addition. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and select Yes for Editable. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 9 Click Open. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. For training purposes. and click OK. specifically sequenced. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 3 On the Settings menu. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. one user has already created a local file. 15 On the File menu. You now have a local copy of the project. click Worksets. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 7 In the Open dialog. This is a system setting. skip the following section. click Options. click Options. enter User 2. consider that person to be User 1. and click OK. click Open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 11 On the File menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. click Save As. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and click Save. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and click OK. select the central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and select Specify. 12 In the Save As dialog. under Username. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 4 Click the General Tab and. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. This file is for your use only. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and proceed to Creating a local copy.

Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . If you only have one workset checked out.” 29 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. If it is not open. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. it becomes the active workset. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. click Worksets. 23 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. expand Views (all).You are now the owner of that workset. open it now. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and double-click Level 1. 17 Click OK. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. select the lower exterior wall. click Save to Central. 27 On the File menu. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. and select Yes for Editable. 24 In the Project Browser. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. User 1: Check out worksets. 19 On the File menu. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. modify the building model.

43 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 46 In the Project Browser. User 1: Reload latest worksets. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. 42 Select Furniture Layout. right-click Copy of Level 1. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. 45 In the Rename View dialog. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. click Worksets. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. However. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 33 On the File menu. 41 On the File menu. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. under Floor Plans. When you save to central. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Save to Central. Before adding any furniture. under Views (all). select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 35 Click OK. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Save to Central. 37 On the File menu. Click Yes. you should create a furniture plan view.” 39 Click OK. and click Rename. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. click Reload Latest. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click OK. select Yes for Editable. under Floor Plans. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. under Floor Plans.

65 Click OK. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 61 Click OK 2 times. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 63 In the Worksets dialog. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Worksets. rather than Families. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. Therefore. click Rename. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. the Visible by default option was not selected. enter Exterior Wall . select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility.200mm. click the Worksets tab. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Edit/New. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Component. and click OK. 60 In the Rename dialog. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 50 On the View menu. and click OK. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Project Standards. 62 On the File menu. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. choose any desk. 66 On the File menu. and click Element Properties. 67 In the Save to Central dialog.” 55 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . click Save to Central. 53 On the File menu. 48 In the Type Selector. are placed under Project Standards. click Reload Latest. 49 On the Design Bar. under Show. and click inside any room. NOTE System families. click Save to Central. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. such as Wall Types.

rvt. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. click Save As. and these problems are rectified. There are specific instructions for each user.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. you save the training file as a central file. modified the building model. and published their changes back to the central file. select Reload Latest. Each user checked out worksets. 3 In the Save As dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Checking out worksets. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. and still have your local files open. select the following. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. throughout this training. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and save 69 On the File menu. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Each user must have network access to the central file. This exercise requires two users and. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click Training Files. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. User 1: Reload latest. select Save to Central. click Options. and click OK. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. In subsequent steps. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. you need to set up your central and local files. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . finished the previous workset exercises. leave this file open in its current state. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. As each of you work. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. 70 On the File menu. leave this file open in its current state. In the final exercise of this tutorial.

8 In the Save As dialog. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Options. and click Save. and click OK. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 12 On the File menu. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. click Options. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. The central file should still be open. You have created a local file which is for your use only. This is the local file for User 1. This is a system setting. Set the Username to User 2. In addition. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. click Open. Next. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and click OK. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 18 In the Save As dialog.4 In the File Save Options dialog. and click Save. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. click Save As. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. On the Settings menu. 15 Click Open. return to the Settings dialog. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. 17 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. select Make this a Central File after save. and select Specify. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 13 In the Open dialog. click Options. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 5 Click Save. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select the central file. 6 On the File menu. and click OK. click Save As.

click Worksets. 27 Under Active Workset. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. select Interior Layout. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 30 On the left exterior wall. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select them.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. double-click Level 1. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 24 Under Active Workset. and click Editing Requests. At this point. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and select Yes for Editable. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. Afterwards. select the second window from the top. click the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 26 In the Worksets dialog. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and then click OK. under Floor Plans. click Worksets. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and then click OK. select the Interior Layout workset. 29 On the Options Bar. After you submit the request. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. You are now the owner of that workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 22 In the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select Exterior Shell. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. and click Open.

and close 39 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. click Close.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and notice the window is in the new location. click Check Now. 35 Click Grant. you requested permission to edit the element. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. select Save to Central. select the request submitted by User 2. 38 Click OK. and the other user granted it. and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . In this multi-user exercise. to Local. 36 Click Close. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. A message informs you that your request has been granted. In this case. select the following.

738 .

The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. In addition. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. The client has asked you to create various options. 739 . After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have multiple sets of design options. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. For example. At any time in the design process. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In this tutorial. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In this particular case.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model.

In the final exercise of this lesson. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. each with multiple design options. TIP In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. 2 In the Design Options dialog. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. the only available command is to create a new option set. therefore. click Edit Selected. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. each is constructed for interchangeability. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. In the second exercise. you can edit it. make your final design decision. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .In the first exercise in this lesson. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. the roof and structure systems must work together. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you design each of the structural options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. After you create a design option. With the second option. click New. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click Close. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. under Option Set. you set up multiple design option sets.

TIP To center the middle column. 9 On the Design Bar. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. In this case. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. or add a dimension string between the columns. By selecting Multiple. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. expand Floor Plans. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . expand Views (all). 11 On the Edit toolbar. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. select: ■ ■ ■ . either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments.4 In the Project Browser. In the following illustration. click Modify. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 5 On the View menu. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click Column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 7 In the Type Selector. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and the third column centered between the two. click 12 On the Options Bar. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. add three columns. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to.

click . 18 On the View toolbar.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. When you are finished. A copy of the three selected columns is added. Because of the size of the columns. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. they are difficult to see in this view. 17 Zoom out and. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. using the same technique.

under Floor Plans. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint.Notice the 12 columns that you added. The second click specifies the end of the beam. and click at its center to set the beam start point. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 21 In the Type Selector. double-click TOP OF CORE. Adding a beam is a two-click process. Zoom in on the upper right column. select Round Bar : 50mm. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . Use the following illustration as a guide. Next. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 19 In the Project Browser. click Beam. you add the beams that span the columns. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. click Modify. In it. The first click specifies the beam start point. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. click . and click the center point.25 On the Edit toolbar. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the View toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy. zoom into the left column. move down to the next set of columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . click 26 On the Options Bar. 28 Zoom out.

32 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. click Rename. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option Set. and click OK. under Option. click Rename. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 45 Under Roofing. not a new option set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. name the option Louvers. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 40 In the Rename dialog. 33 Click Finish Editing. enter Beam for New. click New. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Rename. and click OK. 38 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. under Option. 36 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. and click OK. enter Roofing for New. and click OK.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click New. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click New. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 37 Select Option 2 and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. select Option 1 (primary). 41 Under Option Set. under Option Set. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. enter Brackets for New. There should now be two roofing design options. 46 Under Option. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . under Option. under Option. enter Structure for New.

Under Now Editing. under Structure. under Floor Plans. it will resemble the following illustration. double-click ROOF TERRACE. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. When finished. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Beam. select Edit Selected. click Rename. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 52 Click Close. 48 Under Option. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. name the option Sunscreen. you create the second design option. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Option 2. 53 In the Project Browser. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 51 Under Edit. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs.47 Under Roofing. and click OK.

Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 58 On the Tools menu. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Roof Beam. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Refer to the following illustration. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.

click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam.60 After aligning the beam. click Modify. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. on the Edit toolbar. The second click represents the move end point. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 61 On the Design Bar. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 62 Select the beam and. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point.

67 On the Tools menu. name the file. 70 On the File menu. click . You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. and click Save.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. m_Urban_House-in progress. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. click Save As. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. Notice that even before you close the dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 68 In the Design Options dialog. you need this file in its current state. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 69 Click Close. 66 On the View toolbar. click Finish Editing. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . which is visible by default.rvt.

you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. you set up multiple design option sets. In the next exercise. expand Views (all).rvt. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. 2 On the Tools menu. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. If you need to add dimensions. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 6 In the Project Browser. under Roofing. 5 Click Close. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. Under Now Editing. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. 4 Under Edit. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. click Component. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 8 In the Type Selector.In this exercise. the other for beams. 10 Referring to the following illustration. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. delete them after the rafter is in place. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. With the second option. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . open it now. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click TOP OF CORE. The first option. The second roofing system. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 3 In the Design Options dialog. you design each of the roofing options. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. Sunscreen. do so now. expand Floor Plans. click Edit Selected. each with multiple design options to pick from. a Louver system. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. select Louvers (primary). You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets.

12 Select the rafter you added previously. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . Select Constrain. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. enter 11750 mm for Length. 16 On the Options Bar. click Modify.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click . click Array. 15 On the Edit menu. Select 2nd for Move To. Enter 5 for Number. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. under Other. and click OK.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. when the listening dimension displays. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. and press ENTER.

Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click the Edit menu. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 27 For the array starting point. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Other. Select 2nd for Move To. 20 In the Type Selector. and click Array. click Component. Select Constrain. 25 With the louver still selected. 26 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Design Bar. enter 5475 mm for Length. 23 On the Options Bar. and select the louver you just placed. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. Enter 34 for Number. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click Modify. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration.

enter 300. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 29 On the View toolbar. and press Enter. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. and. when the listening dimension displays.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. click .

38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. and double-click West. click Finish Editing. and click OK. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. and then click Close. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. In this case. under Edit. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 40 On the Options Bar.The louver roof system is complete. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Roofing. 39 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 31 In the Design Options dialog. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Therefore. click . 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 34 In the Project Browser. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. Click OK. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. click Lines. select Sunscreen. click Edit Selected. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . 33 Under Editing. 30 On the Tools menu.

756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . NOTE As you sketch the arcs. The first two points define the ends of the line. and the third point defines the arc.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. click Finish Sketch. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. Under Constraints. Under Constraints. then the center arc. 48 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. You will fix this in a later step. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. click . Select the right arc. then you can modify it through the dimension. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 46 On the Tools menu. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. the top of the next column on the right. 41 Select the top of the left column. click Properties. The arcs should connect. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. 45 Click OK. 49 On the View toolbar. click Trim/Extend.

4 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click {3D}. In this exercise. and click OK. Managing Design Options | 757 . The second roofing system. under Views (all). After exploring the combinations. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Save. you need this file in its current state. and click Duplicate. tertiary. under Edit. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 2 In the Project Browser. 51 In the Design Options dialog. a Louver system. and then click Close. secondary. do so now. enter Primary Option. and last options. expand 3D Views. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. and click Rename. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 52 On the File menu. make it part of the building model. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.The louver roof system is complete. and delete the discarded design options. 50 On the Tools menu. you designed each of the roofing options. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). The first option. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. Managing Design Options In this exercise. click Finish Editing. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. under 3D Views. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. you select a design. Sunscreen.

under 3D Views. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Secondary Option. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 7 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics.5 Right-click each of the copies. click Visibility/Graphics. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click the Design Options tab. 10 In the Project Browser. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under Views (all). 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. 11 On the View menu. 9 Click OK. and click OK. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the Design Options tab. double-click Primary Option. under Views (all).

and click OK. In your design options. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 18 In the Project Browser. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. under 3D Views. 19 On the View menu. and click OK. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. Managing Design Options | 759 . 15 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. double-click Tertiary Option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under 3D Views. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. In this case. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option.14 In the Project Browser. At this point. click the Design Options tab.

29 Select Roofing. 26 Under Option Set. double-click Primary Option. you selected a design. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the current primaries are no longer options.22 On the Tools menu. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. select Make Primary. 30 Under Option Set. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. and deleted the discarded design options. In this exercise. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 27 In the alert dialog. This was the client choice for structural. After exploring the combinations. 23 In the Design Options dialog. click Accept Primary. click Delete to remove the views that used options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Save. 25 Select Structure. Because the client has selected the design option. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. An alert is displayed. 31 In the alert dialog. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. select Beam. 24 Under Option. click Delete. click Yes. under Structure. 33 In the Design Options dialog. made it part of the building model. but should be accepted as part of the building model. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Close. since you no longer need them. 35 On the File menu. The set is deleted. click Yes.

you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. You create new phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. For the client. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. demolish existing walls and doors. You create new phases. In the second exercise. 761 . In the second exercise. complete with schedules. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules.Project Phasing 22 In any project. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. and then add new building model elements. demolish existing construction. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the lesson and exercises that follow. then add new walls and doors in a different location. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. This changes room definition and total building model area.

under Phasing. 7 Click Cancel.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. you do not need to change the project units to metric. are visible in this view. click Project Units. When you create a new project. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and click OK. under Phasing. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. If you wish to do so. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template.rvt. define the units. As you add new elements to the building model. 4 Click Cancel. and open Common\c_Phasing. expand Floor Plans. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. go to the Settings menu. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. 6 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. During the demolition and renovation process. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. This means that all building model elements. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. click (Element Properties). regardless of phase. expand Views (all). Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

19 In the Project Browser. clear Door Tags. enter Level 1 . click Modify. TIP If this were a multi-story building. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. 18 In the Project Browser. click . for Phase Created. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. After you create the views. under Floor Plans. click (Filter Selection). you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. all of the building model elements. 16 In the Rename dialog. under Floor Plans.Existing. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. Because this is a phase-specific view. and click OK. Phasing Your Model | 763 . are highlighted in red. Because this is a renovation project. 17 Click No. 20 In the Rename dialog. 11 In the Filter dialog. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 10 On the Options Bar. enter Level 1 . under Floor Plans. and click OK. right-click Level 1. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. right-click Copy of Level 1 . and click OK.Demo. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. and click Rename. right-click Level 1 . select Existing. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. and click Rename. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. After you release the mouse button. 12 On the Options Bar.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area.Existing. including the door tags.Existing.

22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Because of this time relationship. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. 29 For Composite Plan. enter Composite Plan. click the Phase Filters tab. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Phase status is time-dependent. Demolished.Existing.Demo. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. to which all the building model elements belong. 21 In the Project Browser. You may need to zoom in to see this. and click OK. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. 26 In the Phasing dialog. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. double-click Level 1 . On a logical time line. select Overridden. under Phasing. under New. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. under Floor Plans. new construction occurs after existing construction. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. 27 Click New. and Temporary. In this case. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Existing. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. however. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . double-click Level 1 . Later in this exercise. select Existing. under Floor Plans. There are five default phase filters. you modify these settings. for Phase. Next. 28 Under Filter Name.

select the interior walls one at a time. select red. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. you demolish all elements hosted by it. its display changes to a red dashed line. double-click Level 1 . 34 In the Color dialog. 36 Using the same method. select a lighter blue. 39 In the Phasing dialog. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. select the line style. double-click Level 1 . Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. click OK. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 42 In the Project Browser. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. Phasing Your Model | 765 . That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. or you can use the demolish tool. under Floor Plans. you begin demolition. under Cut ➤ Lines. under Floor Plans. There are two ways to demolish an element.31 Under Phase Status. Next. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. When you demolish the host. As you click each wall. 35 Click OK twice. select Demolished.Demo.Existing. click the value for Color. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. 32 In the Demolished row. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. click (Demolish). Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar.

49 On the Design Bar. under Phasing. and click OK.Existing. for Phase Filter. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 55 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. The demolished walls no longer display. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 52 Open Level 1 . click Wall. add a long horizontal wall. 51 Add a door leading into each room.Demo.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). select Show Previous + New.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Basic Wall: Interior . 53 Open Level 1 . select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Phasing. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. for Phase Filter. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". click Door. 47 In the Type Selector. 50 In the Type Selector.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). because the phase filter is set to Show All. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. right-click Level 1 . regardless of phase. new is shown in blue.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. which are displayed as red. All elements are displayed in this view.New. and existing shows as half-tone. 57 In the Project Browser. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 60 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The renovated building model plan is displayed.Demo. 59 Open Level 1 .New. 62 If necessary. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. click (Default 3D View). Phasing Your Model | 767 . You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. 61 On the View Control Bar.

go to the Settings menu. 63 Close the file. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 Open Level 1 . click Project Units. the rooms change in both definition and size. you can see the new walls added to the building model. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. Notice that this view is the original building model. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. expand Floor Plans. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. you can do so at this time. If you wish to do so. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. As the renovation process continues. In this exercise. click Training Files. and double-click Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . expand Views (all).Demo. All room boundaries are phase-specific. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. You can also see that the room quantities. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. demolition. therefore. In the next exercise. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. 2 Open Level 1 . you do not need to change the project units to metric. define the units. In this view. and new construction. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. In this view. sizes.Existing. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you wish to save this file.New.

10 Open Level 1 .4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . Use the following illustration as a guide. 9 On the Design Bar.Demo. 11 On the Design Bar. click Room. 6 Open Level 1 . 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click in each room as you move to the right. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. In the Phasing dialog. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. click Room.New. and maximize the view. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. yet they have different room numbers. 5 Click OK. 13 Open Level 1 . click Room Tag. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Modify.Existing.

The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. click Tile. and double-click Room Schedule .New Construction.Existing. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 19 On the Window menu. 20 Close the file. In addition. In this exercise. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. In this case. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. expand Schedules/Quantities. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. 18 Open Room Schedule . 17 On the Window menu. View phase-specific room schedules. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 16 In the Project Browser. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. click Close Hidden Windows. The two schedule views tile.

you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In the final lesson. 771 . In these situations. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. modify their visibility. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. In this tutorial. Comparison of alternatives on a site. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. This maximizes efficiency. and manage the links throughout the project.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. You position the building models on the site plan. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. performance.

Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . and the other is a townhouse. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. One building model is a condominium. modify their visibility.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.Linking Building Models In this lesson. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. You link two building models to the project. You position the building models on the site. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes.

you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. and save the file there. c_Condo_Complex. select the three files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . in the Model Linking folder that you created.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Otherwise. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. click Open. right-click. 8 Clear Read-only. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. All three files now reside. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. this system is not exposed to the user. and click OK. 4 On the File menu. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. click Save As. RELATED See the lesson. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. with write permission.rvt. click Open. and open Common\c_Site. Click Open. c_Townhouse. Auto .Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . ■ ■ Manual . click Close. 5 On the File menu. you can do so. Manual .Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. click Training Files. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. and click Properties.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. however. This option is grayed out. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. this option will place the link at a predefined location. Select c_Site. 2 On the File menu.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.■ Auto .

you can go to the Settings menu. If you wish to do so. 10 In the Project Browser. For Positioning. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 11 On the File menu.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. click Project Units. select Auto . and make your changes.Origin to Origin. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. expand Views (all). you do not need to change the project units to metric. expand Floor Plans. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. 13 Click Open. Notice the blue detail lines. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and double-click Level 1.

15 On the Edit toolbar. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model.rvt displays in the Type Selector. The first click specifies the move start point. click (Move).The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. After you select it. The Move command requires two clicks. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 17 For the move endpoint. The linked model moves as one object. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Standard move commands work with linked building models. 16 For the move start point.

and select c_Townhouse. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 18 On the View menu. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. select Auto .Origin to Origin. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. 21 Click Open.After you specify the location to move to.

To rotate an object. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. you first specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . 23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. and click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. click to specify the rotation start point. click (Rotate).The townhouse building model displays above the site model. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. In this case.

Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click (Move).

Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 30 For the starting point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. click (Copy).The townhouse is located within its required footprint. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. The Copy command works much like the Move command.

and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 32 On the Edit menu. 37 On the View toolbar. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. click Rotate. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . for Name. under Identity data. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. click . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click (Default 3D View). enter Townhouse A.

NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels). click Save. do so before continuing. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . 2 On the SteeringWheels. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you need this project file open and in this view. When you originally linked the files. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. In the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. In this exercise.38 On the File menu. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click and hold Orbit. they were placed too low within the site topography. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. After linking the files. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial.

under Views (all). you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 3 In the Project Browser. Click the Revit Links tab. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. In the steps that follow. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and double-click South. click (Align). When using the Align command. and click to select it. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. when it highlights. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. expand Elevations. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. and then select the plane that you want to align. To do this. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan.rvt. you first select the plane you want to align to. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select the line. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In this case.

and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. This would over-constrain the model. 14 On the SteeringWheels. 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 11 Return to the South elevation view. under Elevations. click and hold Orbit. 12 On the View toolbar. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. 15 On the File menu. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. click Save. click 13 On the View toolbar. double-click North.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 .

display settings. double-click South. If you have not completed the previous exercise. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. 8 For Annotation Categories. 9 Under Visibility. scroll down and clear Levels. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. do so before continuing. click the Revit Links tab. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. expand c_Townhouse. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. and the halftone settings for each linked project. you need this project file open and in this view. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 2 On the View menu. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. If the Basics page is set to Custom. In the next exercise. In this exercise. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. select <Custom>. 10 Click OK. you can independently control the visibility settings.rvt.rvt. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. or Custom. detail level. As you can see. click Visibility/Graphics. under Elevations. click By Host View. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. By linked view. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. click Custom. 4 Under Visibility. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. click OK. When you link a file. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project.

Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. and click OK. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. In this case. 24 Click OK. click the Revit Links tab. With linked files. under Display Settings. and then set the detail level to coarse. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select <Custom>. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 23 In the Model categories list. expand c_Townhouse. or fine. You can click the value for Detail Level. click By Host View. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project.rvt. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. select Custom. By default. on the Basics tab. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 14 On the View menu. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu.rvt. By selecting custom under Model Categories. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. 20 For c_Townhouse. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. click the Revit Links tab. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 16 Under Visibility.rvt. no detail level changes are required. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Level 1. Using the Custom option.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. medium.

select c_Townhouse. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case. By default. In most cases. 25 On the Revit Links tab. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. you need this project file open and in this view. all new. In this exercise. In this case.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. under Visibility. 28 Select By linked view for View range. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. phase. In the next exercise. click Save. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise.rvt. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. this is preferable. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. 29 Click OK. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. click OK. demolished. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. click Custom for the Townhouse link. 26 Under Display Settings. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. on a sloped site for instance. there are situations. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied. 31 On the File menu. All other components are grayed out. and phase filter of a specific link. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. However. existing. you manage the linked files. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view.

click Yes. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. In a shared coordinate environment. select c_Condo_Complex. They supply information regarding the links. click the Revit tab. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 .rvt. Notice the Loaded. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. In general. do so before continuing. 3 Under Path Type. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. You learn more about this in the next lesson. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. Locations Not Saved. The default path type is Relative. 5 Click Unload. 7 Click OK. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. and Saved Path fields are read only. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. 4 Under Linked File. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. the link is maintained.

TIP In the Manage Links dialog. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. 8 In the Project Browser. the link is not loaded. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. expand Revit Links. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. When you initially place the link. To do this. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. right-click c_Condo_Complex. and click Reload. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. click Save As. 9 On the File menu. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. However. click the arrow next to the Open button. If you choose not to open that workset.rvt. In these cases. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. In general. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and select Specify. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects.

and the resulting project files. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. and save it as an RVT file. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. name the file Site_Project. The host file consists primarily of site components. In this exercise. In the next lesson. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. you are establishing a shared origin point. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous lesson. In essence. leave the project file open in its current view. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson.10 In the Save As dialog. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). do so before continuing. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. When used in conjunction with model linking. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG.

790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . As indicated in the Status Bar. open it before continuing. In this case. If you have not completed the lesson. do so before continuing. and the resulting project files. click Open. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. click the Condo Complex. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. When you are working in the host project.rvt and click Open. Linking Building Models on page 772. 3 In the drawing area.coordinates are used. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. Select Site_Project. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you have closed the project. 2 On the Tools menu. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

even though both models originate from one linked file. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. but can have multiple additional locations. click to select it. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. If you have not completed the exercise. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. you need this project file open and in this view. when the edges highlight. do so before continuing. In this exercise. it is placed at a specific location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. this location is not saved outside of the host project. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. However. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. and Lot C. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. Lot B. These three locations can be named Lot A. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. 5 On the Design Bar. On the Status Bar. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. select Location 1. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. and click OK. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host.

When constraining a link to a location. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. click Rename. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates.2 On the Options Bar. This is a one-time operation. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . under Instance Parameters. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. select Move instance to. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Select Location dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Record the current position as a location. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. enter Lot A for New. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. 12 On the Options Bar. click Change. click Reconcile. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. under Instance Parameters. . and click OK. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click OK. and click OK. In the Choose Location dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click . a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. 4 Under Value. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click OK. 16 Click Change. ignore the warning. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. This is a two-click process. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. click the Revit tab. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. and click OK. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. Record current position as. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . and click OK. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. 19 In the Select Location dialog. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. When you relocate a project. To explicitly save a location. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Because Lot A is currently in use. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 26 Click OK. select the second option. By relocating a project. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 30 On the Tools menu. click Duplicate. Save locations 21 On the File menu. When you release the mouse button. or cancel the action. The first click specifies the move start point. enter Lot B for Name. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. 23 Click Save Locations. click OK. click Manage Links. and then select the townhouse project. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. When you create a location. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu.Notice the OK button is not active. the active location position is moved. click OK. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. make sure Lot B is selected. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select Save. you cannot redefine its location. a warning displays. Notice the OK button is still not active. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. and the left townhouse resides at that location.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. select Save. click Close. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 34 On the File menu. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. NOTE In the following exercise. you work in one of the linked projects. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 33 On the Edit menu. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. and click OK. 36 On the File menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Save. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. In this exercise.

4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. it is placed automatically within the host project. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on.rvt file. click Open. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. under Floor Plans. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. 2 On the File menu.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Select c_Condo_Complex.By Shared Coordinates. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. When opening the linked file. If you have not completed the exercises. double-click 1st Floor. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. if other models were linked into the same host. In addition. do so before continuing. Also.rvt file. For Positioning. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. Click Open. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The current active location is Lot A. Because this building model only has one named location. select Auto . Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . In this exercise.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. In the host file. click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. enter Lot C. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. If you have not completed the exercises. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. select True North for Orientation. and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. you create a new location. and click OK. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. click OK. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you manage the shared locations. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. 6 Select Lot B. click View Properties. and click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Duplicate. do so before continuing. click Manage Place and Locations. In this exercise. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. orient a view to true north. you need this project file open and in this view. under Graphics.

7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. do so before continuing. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you have not completed the exercise. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin.rvt and click Open. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. You can save the file if you wish. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 10 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. click Close. Select Site_Project. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. In this exercise. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. click Open. On the Options Bar.

3 In the New Schedule dialog. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 5 Under Available fields.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Count. click Schedule/Quantities. click the Fields tab. select Doors. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. and click OK. and click Add. under Category.

In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. under Other. and click Properties. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. select Family and Type for Sort by. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. right-click Door Schedule. You have completed this tutorial. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. click Save. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. 14 On the File menu. click Close. and then click OK twice. expand Schedules/Quantities. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 On the File menu. 12 Select Grand totals.8 Click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Itemize every instance. In this exercise.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

In the first lesson. 803 . which is independent of the project settings. journal cleanup options. under Template file. 6 In the New Project dialog. click OK. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 3 In the Options dialog. they are not saved to project files or template files. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. selection default options. notification preferences. 4 Under Colors. click Training Files. 8 In the New Project dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. Modifying System Settings In this lesson.rte. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Finally. you modify the system environment. and set it as your default template. Notice that the drawing area is black. click the value for Selection color. and click OK. you create an office template. In the second lesson. click the Graphics tab. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. 10 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. These settings control the graphics. 11 Under Colors. click Browse. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. select Invert background color. and your username when using worksets.

click the Graphics tab. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. select red. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Settings. click Modify. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and select the wall. click Wall. For Tooltip assistance. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 18 On the Design Bar. clear Invert background color. select yellow. However. click Modify. the elements causing the error display using this color. When an error occurs. For Selection color. 15 Click OK. 26 In the Options dialog. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. click No. click Training Files. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. select One hour. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. and click OK.rvt. select None. 22 When prompted to save changes. 14 Under Notifications. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog.12 In the Color dialog. 13 Click the General tab. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors.

you specify default file locations. 7 In the Options dialog. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. select Normal. select the folder to save your files to by default. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). family template files. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. centralized. If prompted. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. select your preferred Save reminder interval. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. click Browse. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. For Tooltip assistance. and click Browse to select a template. click Browse. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. However. Specifying File Locations on page 805. 3 Under Default template file. including your default project template. do not save the changes. such as in a large. and click Open. 4 Click Cancel. click Places. Under Journal File Cleanup. under Default path for family template files. click the File Locations tab. These files are used in the software support process. click Browse. notice the list of library names. 5 Under Default path for user files.27 Click the General tab. you can start a new project with that template. Your login name displays by default. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 10 In the Places dialog. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 8 Click Cancel. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 2 In the Options dialog. and family libraries. TIP To view a template. Under Username.

and select it as the library path. under Libraries. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and change the name to My Library. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and click the icon side of the field. click (Add Value). When you are opening. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. and you can create new libraries. In the following illustration. and Import dialogs. Load. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. or loading a Revit Architecture file. saving. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 11 In the Places dialog. templates. and click Open.library names and path. Save.

and decal image files. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click Edit. 21 Click the File Locations tab. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 5 In the text editor. click My Library. and click OK twice. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. If you work in a large office. Load. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 3 Under Settings. custom color files. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. and Import dialogs. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click the Spelling tab. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 9 In the text editor. 24 Click 25 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Save. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. scroll down the list of building industry terms. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. 22 Click Places. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. view the current path. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 2 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Edit. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click the My Library icon. 23 Select My Library. 15 Under Library Name. such as bump maps. If you want to relocate this path. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. This path is determined during installation. 28 Click OK. 19 Click Cancel. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. specify the new location here. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab.

21 In the text editor. do not save the changes. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Restore Defaults. click Training Files. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Modify. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Under Personal dictionary. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.11 In the Options dialog. click OK. click Text. work with snapping turned off. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the text editor. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. you modify snap increments. As you zoom in and out within a view. If prompted. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. In this exercise. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. click OK. under Template file. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Options dialog.rte. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 14 Click in the drawing area. click File menu ➤ Save. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. you modify snap settings. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. You can turn snap settings on and off. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click default template. 19 Under Settings. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click the Spelling tab. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. delete sheetmtl-CU. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Edit. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 18 In the Options dialog.

zoom out until it does so. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 Under Object Snaps. While sketching. and enter 500 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. and move the cursor to the right. 8 In the Snaps dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. enter SM. TIP To zoom while sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. For example.6 Under Dimension Snaps. If it does not. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. clear Chain. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. such as ZO to zoom out. If you do not have a wheel button. click OK. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. snapping reverts to the system default settings.. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . click Wall. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.

click in the Length dimension snap increments box. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .. click Modify. Do not set the wall end point. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. This is the increment that you added previously. and specify the wall endpoint. and do not save the file. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and delete the value 500 . 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 18 Enter SM. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 24 Click OK. and move the cursor to the right. Notice that snapping is once again active. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 21 Move the cursor downward. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and click Wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. If you move the cursor along the wall. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. the midpoint. and the wall edges. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar.

save the project file with a unique name. and object styles. click Training Files. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. annotations. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Finally. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. You create and modify materials. lines. In the steps that follow. you render a region to observe the changes. and open Metric\m_Settings. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Using these options. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. fill patterns. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. When you apply a material to an element.

Fieldstone material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. scale. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. select Stone. However. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. and texture of the material. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. 10 Click the Graphics tab. enter Masonry . and click OK. for Class. In the next exercise. and select Masonry . Masonry . all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. In the Materials dialog. 11 Click OK.Stone. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. 3 Click (Duplicate).Fieldstone. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. and click OK. These details will display in rendered images. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. this material provides a starting point for the new material. The properties describe the color. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 6 Click Replace. When a model element is loaded into a project. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. read-only library for render appearances. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. 2 Scroll down the materials list. In the steps that follow. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. When you change properties of a render appearance.Fieldstone. The Render Appearance Library is a local. and double-click 02 Entry Level. 9 Click Apply. and click (Element Properties).

22 Select the left exterior wall. 18 For Finish 1. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. 17 For Structure. and click OK. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. and click OK. select the rear exterior wall. 20 In the Materials dialog. 26 On the View Control Bar. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 16 Enter the new wall name. click Model Graphics Style. click Edit/New. click Edit. 25 On the View toolbar. click This is the material that you created. . select Masonry . Fieldstone on CMU. 24 In the Type Selector. 15 Click Duplicate. click in the Material field. 21 Click OK three times. 19 On the right side of the Material field. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. click (Default 3D View).Fieldstone. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 23 While pressing CTRL.14 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . It is currently assigned the material Masonry . All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.Brick.Fieldstone.

under Quality. select Low or Medium. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. and click Rendering. 29 In the 3D view. click Rendering Dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog. 32 In the Rendering dialog. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. select Region. In the following exercise. The rendering process begins. 31 In the Rendering dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. select the render region (a red rectangle). 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. for Setting. click Render. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. right-click the Design Bar. When finished. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and there is no stone pattern applied in this view.

such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Elevations. Zoom into the model.rvt. Then click Render again. such as steel. in the Rendering dialog. 3 Under Pattern Type. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. choose Model. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Custom. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 7 Under Custom. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. click Import. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. m_Settings-in progress. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 5 Click New. click Show the model. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. click Show the model. and clear Region. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. and double-click West. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress.

Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall.56. In the Materials dialog. and for Import scale. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog. for Finish 1. click Modify. click Edit/New. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 11 Click OK. under Pattern Type.pat. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. 10 For Name. 18 Under Surface Pattern.Fieldstone material. enter . notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . (Element Properties). click . It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 22 Click OK three times.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. click in the Material field. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 13 On the Options Bar. select fldstn.Fieldstone. 23 On the Design Bar. enter Fieldstone. click Edit. click 15 For Structure. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. click to select a fill pattern. select Model. 9 Under Custom. click Training Files. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click OK.

click (Default 3D View).rvt. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. m_Settings-in progress. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. adjust your zoom settings as needed. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Controlling Object Styles | 817 . expand 3D Views.25 On the View toolbar. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. there are often multiple window types within a project. TIP If the pattern does not display. For example. 2 On the keyboard. and double-click 3 Windows.

click in the Value column. for Trim Exterior Material. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click (Element Properties). 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 In the Materials dialog. and click . . and click 15 Click OK twice. for Trim Exterior Material. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.3 On the View Control Bar. click By Category (located under the materials list). 5 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click (Element Properties). under Materials and Finishes. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click By Category. 16 On the Design Bar. 9 Click OK twice. 11 On the Options Bar. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click in the Value column. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 8 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. 10 Select the arched window. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click Edit/New.

select Paint. and click OK. click in the Material column. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 19 For Trim. click OK. select Trim. for Class. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 23 Click Replace. enter Trim . for Name. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . . expand Windows. and click OK. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. descriptions. When you render a 3D view. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab.red paint. or keywords include the word red. type red. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 28 Under Shading. and select Trim. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 18 On the Model Objects tab. (Duplicate). click OK. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. 25 In the search field. 29 In the Materials dialog. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names.

2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. is open with the 3D view active.rvt. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. Now that you have created a line pattern. 10 For Line Color.31 On the View toolbar. 11 For Line Pattern. select Roofs. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. (Default 3D view). Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Settings-in progress. for Name. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click New. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. enter Roof Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Roof Line. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. under Category. select Red. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line.

13 In the Project Browser.12 Click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. but not the line pattern. double-click to Building. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . Notice that the line color displays in this view. under 3D Views. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. click Model Graphics Style.

18 For Line Color. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. sections. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Plans. under Floor Plans. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. click Override. elevations. 22 On the Model Categories tab. For Color. 20 Click OK. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select 5. For Pattern. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . for Visibility.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. double-click 03 Roof. 19 For Line Pattern. select Black. under Category. select Roofs. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select Solid. 15 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Roof Line. select Blue. select Roofs.

specify the following: ■ For Plane. click New. 29 For Name. select Level: 02 Entry Level. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . Click Click (Draw). select Double dash. under Modify Subcategories. For Line Pattern. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select 2. double-click Site. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select Red. Notice the site topography and the property lines. under Floor Plans. 31 Click OK. For Line Color. enter Zoning Setback. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection.25 Click OK twice. 34 On the Options Bar. This places the line above the topography. click Lines. 33 In the Type Selector. select Zoning Setback. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. (Line). 30 For the Zoning Setback category.

as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 43 Click OK. and then clear Property Lines. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 38 On the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. NOTE If Site is not selected.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. click (Default 3D View). use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and clear Property Lines. (Default 3D View). 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 39 Click OK. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. and clear Zoning Setback. expand Lines. 44 On the View toolbar. 36 On the View toolbar. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. Expand Site. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. and clear Zoning Setback. double-click 02 Entry Level. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 40 In the Project Browser. select it.

3 In the Type Properties dialog. For Units.Imperial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. click Dimension. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click one wall. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. select Feet and fractional inches. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. select Linear . 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. m_Settings-in progress. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. click the default value. click another wall. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear.rvt. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. You have created a new dimension style. To place a dimension. for Units Format. 7 Click OK twice. and place a dimension on the floor plan.Imperial and click OK.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 5 Under Text. 10 On the Standard toolbar. under Floor Plans. and then click outside the second wall. double-click 02 Entry Level. 4 Enter the name Linear . click Duplicate. Modifying Annotations | 825 . (Undo). 9 In the Type Selector.

and select the drop-down arrow that displays. In the steps that follow.Number as the assigned tag. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. notice that the label displays 1i. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 27 On the west wall. In the preview image.Number. 19 Click Load. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Leave M_Window Tag .Number.Number is now the assigned tag. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . click M_Window Tag . This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.rfa. select the 3 window tags. click Tag ➤ By Category. 18 In the Tags dialog. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click (Element Properties).14 On the Options Bar. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. under Category. 26 On the Options Bar. scroll down to Windows. click Tag All Not Tagged. 21 In the Tags dialog. 16 Click Cancel. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 22 Under Loaded Tags. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Then press Delete. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. clear Leader. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 24 While pressing CTRL. 23 Click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. click the bottom window.

5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 8 Under Walls. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. click Modify. 3 In the Format dialog. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Unless overridden. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. and Detail Level Options on page 827. the other displays the instance value. click the default value. Temporary Dimensions. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value.Under Category. Specifying Units of Measurement. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK. dimensions use these project settings. For Unit symbol. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. m_Settings-in progress. verify that Create is clear. for Area. select Faces. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 31 On the Design Bar. select To the nearest 100. Click OK. (Default 3D View). dimension values display using this setting. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. Specifying Units of Measurement. In the second section. select Openings. you specify the project units of measurements. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. M_Window Tag . Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. for Length. 6 Click OK. 30 Under Leader. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags.Number.Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. select meters squared. and click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the final section. notice Window Tags appears twice. select 0 decimal places.Temporary Dimensions.rvt. 32 On the View toolbar. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Unless overridden. for Rounding. and Detail Level Options | 827 . you modify the detail level assignments. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. In the first section. 9 Under Doors and Windows. click the default value.

These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. You do not select a view scale to move it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. In this table. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column.In this project. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. and expand 3D Views. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. click . When you create a new view and specify its view scale.rvt. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. 12 Click OK. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. In this exercise. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project.

expand each view type. 10 In the Project Browser. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 2 In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped by phase. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and click OK. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. In the Project Browser. and click Apply. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand Sheets (all).Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. select Discipline. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 5 On the Views tab.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 8 Select Phase. and click OK. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . select Type/Discipline.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline.Phase 2-Structure West Wing .

14 In the Project Browser. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and click OK. under Sheets.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 16 Click the Views tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. click the Folders tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click New. and click OK. expand each sheet set. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. levels. View Type (Family and Type). Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. Whenever you create a new project or template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and open Metric\Templates. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. Creating an Office Template on page 831. enter a unique file name. and view names. In the lesson that follows. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. navigate to your preferred directory. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. and click Open. expand Complete. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. you create an office template. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. you select the starting point for your office template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. For example. expand 3D Views. and click OK. You can choose from several templates. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. 21 In the Project Browser. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. If you want to save this file. 2 Under Template file. and Discipline. dimensions styles. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. the same rules apply.rte template. click Training Files. when you create a new project. In this lesson. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. You can also save these settings in a template file. When you create new projects. and click OK. under Views. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. In that case. click Browse. and expand both Architectural and Structural. When you create a new template based on an existing template. Creating an Office Template | 831 . Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. Proceed to the next lesson.

15 Under Create new. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 13 Select the default template. click Browse. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.5 In the New Project dialog. 14 Click Open. select Project. 9 In the Project Browser. For example. In this exercise. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. select Project template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 7 In the Project Browser. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can select it now. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. drag a zoom region around the level heads. for Create new. in the drawing area. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. When you create the material. and double-click North. 6 Click OK. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. weights. If you have additional projects open. If you want to use a template other than the default. 12 Under Template File. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. and click OK. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. close them. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. you modify the project settings for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects.

and change render appearance properties. You can align. and move model patterns. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. Modifying System Settings on page 803. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. create and modify them as needed. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. line patterns. see a preview of the rendered material. line colors. and similar attributes. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. If you change render appearance properties. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. or modify existing patterns. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. texture. 2 Scroll down the materials list. When you create or modify a material. 4 Click Replace. TIP For more information about creating new materials. 13 If necessary. In the Object Styles dialog. the changes are saved as part of the project template. annotation objects. and imported objects.During this exercise. 9 Click OK when finished. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. specific modifications are not dictated. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. transparency. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. You do this by defining the render appearance. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. or refer to the online help. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . For more information. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. and scroll through the list of categories. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. see the previous lesson. including color. or refer to the online help. Observe the materials that are already defined. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. create new subcategories. For more details on modifying these settings. you can set line weights. rotate. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. and materials for model objects.

line color. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. and create new subcategories as needed. click Duplicate. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. and dimensions. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 20 Click OK. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. tags. or line pattern as needed. 29 Click OK. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 32 To modify a line pattern. and specify the properties. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design.15 Modify categories. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. To see the details of a particular style. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 34 Click OK. You can add and delete view scales. 19 If necessary. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select it. select it from this list. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. modify the line weight. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. create new line subcategories. and click Edit. name the style. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 For existing line categories. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. such as section lines and dimension lines. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab.

and choose a decimal symbol. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 53 For Length. Volume. For example. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 46 Click OK. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. click Format. and Angle settings. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. In the Tags dialog. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 60 Under Walls. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. and specify the properties. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 62 Click OK. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. click Duplicate. Linear. 57 Specify the Slope option. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category.40 Click OK. 50 To load new annotation tags. and click OK. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. To see the details of a particular style. 55 Click OK. when you add a door with the tag option selected. select it from this list. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. angular. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. name the style. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. and radial dimensions are modified separately. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. TIP In the drawing area. 61 Under Doors and Windows. 58 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category.

you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. When you create a new view. 69 If necessary. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. To move the view scales. Using the arrows between the columns. rename. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. or Fine. In such a case. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. click the arrows between columns. Although these settings can be saved within a template. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. create new browser organization types. 65 Click OK. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 70 Click the Sheets tab. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. However. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. 72 If necessary. or edit existing organization types. See Setting up If necessary. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and move view scales as needed. Medium. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 71 Delete. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Use the table below as a checklist. The detail level is based on view scale. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. rename. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Links to associated tutorials are provided. 64 Review the table. or edit existing organization types. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. click the Views tab. For example. You can find additional information in Help. 73 Click OK. create new browser organization types. Each command is available on the Settings menu. In a typical project. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 68 Delete. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. and make modifications in each area as necessary.

If necessary. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. phase filters. you may want to delete. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. furniture. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. notice the list of doors already loaded. title blocks. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . if you load every available window type. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. Although the options are endless. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. You can load any family or group into a template. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you do both. modify.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. you can set the default contour line interval. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. or electrical fixtures. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. 2 In the Type Selector. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If this selection is satisfactory. In the steps that follow. you could load detail components. do so before starting this exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. you can move onto the next component type. and the poche depth. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. the section cut material. or add to this selection. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. Although this is possible. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. there are some important thoughts to consider. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. For example. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. Depending on the intended use of this template. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. For example. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. and electrical fixtures. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. However. you can set up the phases. click Door. or use the Project Browser. You can also specify how room volumes are computed.

Click Duplicate. and click OK. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Notice that each family category is listed. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. click Edit/New. and click OK. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Make modifications. expand Families. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Modify type properties. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Enter a name. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. or modify a door. click Bar. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. In the Element Properties dialog. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .3 To modify. Select it. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. and click Open. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. or load a new door type. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. create. create. In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Load.

click 12 Click Preview. Discipline. click Load. load. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the views required for your template. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. In addition. In addition. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. This title block is currently part of the template. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. you created new projects using different templates. create. 13 Click OK. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. In this exercise. and click Delete. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. 11 On the Options Bar. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. View Range. To do so. right-click the component. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. (Element Properties). and select the title block type.) 10 Expand the title block. Detail Level. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. To load a title block.9 Expand Annotation Symbols.

NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. click Apply. 11 Click Apply. 12 In the Project Browser. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. Every time a new plan view is created. under Floor Plans. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. and double-click Level 1. and click OK. In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. double-click Site. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. you will first modify view templates. In addition. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and click OK. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and then click OK. At any time. After applying the template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. select Site Plan. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 6 Click OK. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 2 Under Names. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. you can apply a view template to any view. 15 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. and apply the appropriate template. select Architectural Plan. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. open the view from the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list.settings of categories and subcategories. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. double-click Level 2. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. double-click South. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. click Apply. 4 If necessary. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. By default. Blue level heads have associated plan views. and. notice that you have the option to rename. and select the desired direction. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. or delete them as needed. 31 Rename the 3D View. duplicate. on the View toolbar. and click Properties. right-click {3D}. review the existing floor plans. in the shortcut menu. duplicate. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. use the ViewCube. 27 Create additional levels as needed. click Orient to a Direction.Notice the level names. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. and click Save View. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. click Schedule/Quantities. (Default 3D View). the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. To orient the 3D view to another view. click Orient to View. a face. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. and select the desired view. in the Project Browser. To orient the 3D view to a direction. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. 30 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. If prompted. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. or delete this view. right-click the ViewCube. 24 On the Options Bar. expand 3D Views. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . click 29 In the Project Browser. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. Rename. right-click the ViewCube. or an edge of the ViewCube. click Level. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. 23 To add more levels to the template. Black level heads have no associated views. 22 In the Project Browser. If it does not display. If you want to modify view properties. right-click the view name. review the floor plans. and click Rename. and elevations. right-click the ViewCube. 21 In the Project Browser. enter a view name. ceiling plans. select Make Plan View.

Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. assign filters. or exportlayersdgn. and modify their properties accordingly. modify settings as needed. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. select one. on the View tab of the Design Bar. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and click Rename. select the category type. and click OK. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar.txt for AutoCAD. modify settings as needed. When you import a DWG or DXF file. select the title block and delete it. click Add View. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. click Sheet. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. You are prompted to select a title block. Right-click the sheet name. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. On the Filter tab. select and order required fields. You can still add views to the sheet. modify settings as needed. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. On the Appearance tab. select the default title block. 42 Create new sheets as needed.You can add schedules to a template. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. On the Formatting tab. expand Sheets (all). 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. To do so. Select a view. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 40 To add views to the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 Click OK. To later add a title block to a sheet. After the sheet is created. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.txt for MicroStation). The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. in the Project Browser. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. and click OK. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. and click OK.

TIP In the Export Layers dialog. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. project parameters. name the file. When you create a multi-category schedule. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. They cannot be shared with other projects. doors. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. and so on. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. therefore. and click Save. name the file. You can save these mappings to a text file. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. for example. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. windows. name the file. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and click Save. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. These settings are retained within the project template. click Save As. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. and they become the set mappings for the project. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Using shared parameters. 2 For each category. 8 In the dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. select Save As. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. and so on. 9 Click Save As. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. and click Save. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. For example. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). When scheduling. 5 For each category. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter.

For each parameter group.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. click New. and choose a shared parameter. select a parameter discipline type. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. because each office has a unique set of needs. enter a parameter name. 17 Under Discipline. select a parameter value type. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 Add project parameters as needed. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 10 Click OK. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 24 To add a shared project parameter. and specify its discipline and type. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. If a file already exists. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. under Groups. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 9 Name the parameter. you may want to save the file to a network location. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. for Name. and select Shared Parameter. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 11 For each parameter group. 3 Name and save the file. 22 Click OK. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. and click OK. 26 Click OK. select Project parameter. 25 Click Select. click New. project parameters. 2 Click Create. 14 Click Add. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 8 Under Parameters. select a group to add parameters to. click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 21 Under Categories. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 19 Under Group parameter under. add required parameters. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 5 Enter the group name. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. you can create a list of parameters. 16 Under Parameter Data.

28 Click OK. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. make minor modifications if necessary. and click Open. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. By creating named settings within the template. 4 Modify the printer settings. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . 6 In the New dialog. 35 For Name. you create named print settings. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Click OK. you need only select a setting. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click Setup. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. 5 Click Save As. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. enter a name for the schedule. The tag is now part of the template. select Multi-Category. and make it your default template file. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. For information on creating multi-category tags. and print. 2 Under Printer. you can load them into the template. 37 When you have completed the schedule. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. For each printer. select the tag. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. for Name. click OK. By going first to the Print command. paper placement. save the file as a template. 3 Under Settings. and the percent of actual size. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. and click OK. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. In this exercise. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. select a printer for which you want to create named settings.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 34 For Category. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 32 Navigate to the directory. or refer to the online help.

and click Save. This can provide a good starting point for a template. and saved them to a template. loaded components. save it in a network location. In this lesson. you modified settings. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. Your template is complete.rte). select it. and click OK. click Setup. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. click Save as. In addition. In addition. If you have a project. 25 Click OK. and click Open. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Browse. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 15 Name the template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. modify the printer settings. By investing the time to individualize your template. 18 Click Browse. 23 For Default template file. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. If you need to share this file with others. enter a new name for the printer. The only remaining task is to save it. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Create additional settings as needed. 20 Click OK. and click Open. 9 In the Print dialog. select a different printer. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 11 Click Close when finished. You can also set this template as your default template. 14 Under Save as type. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 22 Click the File Locations tab. 19 Select the template. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Template Files (*. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 24 Navigate to the template location. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. and create new settings for this printer. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful